You are on page 1of 912

Index

SERVICE MANUAL

8050/CF5001
C500
8150

2004. 12
Ver. 3.0
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS


Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing ser-
vice work.

IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while ser-
vicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND


CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “ CAUTION” is defined
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.

DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury


WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:

:Precaution when using the copier. General precaution Electric hazard High temperature

:Prohibition when using the copier.


General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble

:Direction when using the copier.


General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth

S-1 1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY WARNINGS

1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY


KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design
and a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects
have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unau-
thorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.

PROHIBITED ACTIONS

DANGER

• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.

• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-
der or similar object.

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.

• Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT

• Using parts not specified by KMBT

1 S-2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Konica Minolta brand copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met,
in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily
use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability,
the CE must perform regular safety checks.

2.1 Power Supply

Connection to Power Supply

WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedi-
cated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consump-
tion.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. kw

• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.

• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as the
plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power
supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or elec-
tric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact quali-
fied electrician for the installation.

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.

Ground Lead

WARNING
• Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done

S-3 2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Ground Lead

WARNING
• Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)

Power Plug and Cord

WARNING
• For the products that use the power cord set (inlet type), be sure to follow the
directions given below.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture prop-
erly.
a. Be sure to check to see if the power cord is securely inserted into the
main body side inlet.
b. When the fixing of the cord is indicated in the installation instructions,
be sure to fix it securely by using the fixing materials provided in the
same package.
c. When the power cord is damaged with its sheath broken, be sure to
replace it with the specified power cord set.
When the power cord is not securely inserted, an abnormal heat may gen-
erates due to a poor contact of the cord, thus resulting in a fire.

• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.


Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

2 S-4
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Power Plug and Cord

WARNING

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.

• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.

• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.

Wiring

WARNING

• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-
let.
If used, the risk of fire exists.

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.


Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.

2.2. Installation Requirements

Prohibited Installation Place

WARNING
• Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.

• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.

S-5 2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

When not using product for a long time

WARNING

• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.

Ventilation

CAUTION
• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time

Fixing

CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.

Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.

• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from


the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still pow-
ered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.

2 S-6
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.


You may get burnt.

Work Performed with the Copier Powered

WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.

• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.

• Be careful not to drop metal chips such as a clip, staple and/or a screw into
the inside of the product or its gaps.
A short circuit may occurs inside the product, thus resulting in an electric
shock and/or a fire.

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.


Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-
trode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.


Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.

S-7 2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make
sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.

• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.

• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-
fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.

• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.

• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).

• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-
inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.

2 S-8
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Consumables

WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.


You may be burned due to dust explosion.

HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS


• When solution is used for cleaning, be sure to unplug the power cord from
the power outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.

• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
A risk of fire exists.

• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
A risk of fire exists.

• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.


Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.

S-9 2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY INFORMATION

IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-
keted in the United States.

This copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.


Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user opera-
tion.

S-10
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious accidents.

• Overall protection circuit


• Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit

These safety circuits are described below to provide the service engineer with a renewed awareness of them in order to pre-
vent servicing errors that may impair their functions.

1. Overall protection circuit

CBR1

NF

CBR2

8050sf001

1.1 Protection by circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) and circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)


CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instantaneously when an excessive current flows due to a short in the AC
line.

CAUTION:
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

S-11
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2. Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating
prevention circuit

PRCB ACDB

TH1 L2 TS1

TH3 AC driver L3
FHCB
Control section
TH2 section
TS2
L4
TH4
RL1
RL1 8050sf002e

2.1 Protection by software


The output voltage from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) is read by the
CPU. If this voltage is abnormal, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening main relay (RL1).

CAUTION:
• The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with
the specified clearances.
• The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

2.2 Protection by the hardware circuit


The output voltages from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2), fixing temperature
sensor /3 (TH3), and fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) are compared with the abnormality judgment reference
value in the comparator circuit. If the output voltage from TH1, TH2, TH3, or TH4 exceeds the reference value, L2,
L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening RL1.

CAUTION:
• The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with
the specified clearances.
• Periodically check the contact between the fixing upper roller and TH3 and the contact
between the fixing lower roller and TH4, and replace them if any abnormality is detected.
• The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

2.3 Protection by thermostat /1 (TS1) and thermostat /2 (TS2)


When the temperature of the fixing upper roller exceeds the specified value, TS1 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the
power to L2 and L3 directly. When the temperature of the fixing lower roller exceeds the specified value, TS2 is
turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L4 directly.

CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2.

S-12
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE


Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric
shock.

8050sf003e

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

S-13
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

8050sf004e

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

S-14
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

8050sf005e

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

S-15
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

8050sf006e

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

2 S-16
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

8050sf007e

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

PS

Unplug the machine before removing platen glass.

Debrancher le copieur avant de retirer la vitre d'exposition.

Desenchufe la maquina antes de quitar el vidrio.


~
Desconecte a unidade da tomada antes de remover o vidro de exposicao.

8050sf008e

S-17 1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

8050sf009

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

2 S-18
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 CONTENTS

CONTENTS

I OUTLINE
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

II UNIT EXPLANATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Composition of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Notation of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Measures to take in case of an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
List of major differences between the old type and the new type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

I OUTLINE
1. OUTLINE OF SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
3. CENTER CROSS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
4. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
5. DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
5.1 Drum drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
5.2 Transfer belt conveyance/pressure drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
5.3 Developing drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
5.4 Toner supply drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
5.5 Toner collection drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
5.6 Fixing drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
5.7 Paper feed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
5.7.1 Paper feed tray /1 to /3 drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
5.7.2 Vertical conveyance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
5.8 ADU drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
5.8.1 Bypass tray drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
5.8.2 Registration drive/loop drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
5.8.3 ADU conveyance drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
5.8.4 Reverse paper exit drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
5.9 Main body paper exit drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
5.10 Scanner drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
6. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
6.1 Image creation flow and function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
6.2 Charging process (Step 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

i 2
CONTENTS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

6.3 Laser exposure process (Step 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25


6.4 Developing process (Step 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
6.5 1st transfer process (Step 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
I OUTLINE

6.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28


6.7 Separation process (Step 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
6.8 Drum cleaning (Sub step 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
6.9 Pre-charging exposure (Sub step 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
6.10 Transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
6.11 2nd transfer roller /L cleaning (Sub step 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
II UNIT EXPLANATION

6.12 Toner collection (Sub step 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31


6.13 Process speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

II UNIT EXPLANATION
1. SCANNER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
1.2.1 Home position search in the exposure unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
1.2.2 Shading correction reading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

1.2.3 Original reading mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4


1.2.4 Original reading control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
1.2.5 APS control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
1.2.6 AE control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
1.2.7 Image processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2. WRITE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.2.1 Image writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.2.2 Color registration correction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
3. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
3.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
3.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
3.2.1 Image formation timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
4. DEVELOPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
4.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
4.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
4.2.1 Flow of developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
4.2.2 Developing control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
4.2.3 Toner supply control to the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
4.2.4 Developing bias control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
4.2.5 Durability of the developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
5. TRANSFER BELT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
5.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
5.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
5.2.1 Transfer belt pressure/release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
5.2.2 Image correction unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
5.2.3 1st transfer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
5.2.4 2nd transfer control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

ii
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 CONTENTS

5.2.5 Control for the prevention of the flipping of the belt cleaning blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
5.2.6 Control against belt filming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
6. TONER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

I OUTLINE
6.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
6.2 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
6.2.1 Toner supply control to the toner hopper section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
6.2.2 Toner supply control to the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
6.2.3 Copy/print operation stop control due to no toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
7. TONER COLLECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

II UNIT EXPLANATION
7.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
7.2 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
7.2.1 Toner collection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
7.2.2 Waste toner full detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
8. PAPER FEED TRAY /1 TO /3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
8.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
8.2 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
8.2.1 Paper feed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
8.2.2 Up/down plate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
8.2.3 Remaining paper detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8.2.4 Paper size detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
9. BYPASS FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
9.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
9.2 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
9.2.1 Tray up drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
9.2.2 Paper feed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
9.2.3 Paper size detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
10. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
10.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
10.2 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
10.2.1 Vertical conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
11. REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
11.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
11.2 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
11.2.1 Switching control of the paper exit/ADU conveyance path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
11.2.2 Reverse/exit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
11.2.3 ADU conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
11.2.4 Paper reverse control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
11.2.5 ADU pre-registration control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
11.2.6 Registration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
11.2.7 2nd transfer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
11.2.8 Paper exit full detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
12. FIXING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
12.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
12.2 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
12.2.1 Fixing drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
12.2.2 Pressure/release control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
12.2.3 Web control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

iii 2
CONTENTS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

12.2.4 Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68


13. INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
13.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
I OUTLINE

14. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70


14.1 Toner density control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
14.2 Dmax control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
14.3 Charging potential control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
14.3.1 Correction of the reference value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
14.3.2 Low humidity environment correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
II UNIT EXPLANATION

14.4 Dot diameter adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72


14.5 Gamma correction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
15. OTHER CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
15.1 Parts to which power is supplied even when the main power switch is turned off . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
15.2 Parts that operate only when the power switch is turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
15.2.1 Parts that operate when the main power switch is turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
15.2.2 Parts that operate when the sub power switch is turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
15.3 Fan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
15.3.1 Fan composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
15.4 Operation board control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

15.4.1 Operation board composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77


15.5 Counter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
15.5.1 Counter composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
15.5.2 Counter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
15.6 ACS control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
15.6.1 Switching between the color mode and the black and white mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
15.6.2 Copy count when using ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80

III DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.2 Replacing the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
1.3 Replacing the toner collection box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
1.4 Angle adjustment of the operation board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main board unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
2. SCANNER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
2.1 Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
2.2 Removing and reinstalling the platen glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
2.3 Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
2.4 Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.5 Removing and reinstalling the exposure lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
2.6 Removing the scanner wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2.7 Reinstalling the scanner wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3. WRITING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.1 Screw that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.2 Removing and reinstalling the write unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
4. PROCESS UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
4.1 Flow of the disassembly of the process unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

iv
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 CONTENTS

4.2 Cleaning the charging corona unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30


4.3 Cleaning/replacing, removing and reinstalling the charging wire assy
/the charging control plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

I OUTLINE
4.4 Pulling out the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
4.5 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
4.6 Replacing the belt cleaning roller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
4.7 Replacing the belt cleaning blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
4.8 Replacing the toner collection sheet /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
4.9 Replacing the belt separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
4.10 Replacing the transfer belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

II UNIT EXPLANATION
4.11 Replacing the 1st transfer roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
4.12 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
4.13 Replacing the drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
4.14 Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
4.15 Replacing the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
4.16 Replacing the developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
4.17 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
4.18 Removing and reinstalling the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
4.19 Removing and reinstalling the image correction unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. TONER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
5.2 Replacing the charging dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
6. TONER COLLECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
6.1 Cleaning of the belt collection pipe/vertical/horizontal/conveyance pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
7. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
7.1 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
7.2 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed trays /1 to /3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
7.3 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
7.4 Replacing the double feed prevention rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
7.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
7.6 Removing and reinstalling the tray up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
8. BYPASS TRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
8.1 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
8.2 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
8.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
9. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
9.1 Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
9.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
10. FIXING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
10.1 Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
10.2 Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
10.3 Replacing the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
10.4 Replacing the fixing lower heater lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
10.5 Replacing the fixing roller /U, ball bearing /U and the heat insulating sleeve /U . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
10.6 Replacing the fixing roller /L, ball bearing /L and the heat insulating sleeve /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
10.7 Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /3, and removing and
reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /1 and the thermostat /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104

v 2
CONTENTS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

10.8 Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /4, and removing and
reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /2 and the thermostat /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
10.9 Replacing the fixing drive gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
I OUTLINE

10.10Replacing the fixing cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116


10.11Replacing the fixing torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
10.12Replacing the paper exit roller /Up (for the new type only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
11. REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
11.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
11.2 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
11.3 Replacing the separation discharging plate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
II UNIT EXPLANATION

11.4 Replacing the transfer ground plate unit and the 2nd transfer roller /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
11.5 Replacing the registration roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
11.6 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 and /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
11.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 and /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
11.8 Replacing the ADU pre-registration clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135
11.9 Replacing the decurler roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
11.10Replacing the paper exit guide roller /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
11.11 Replacing the paper exit roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143
11.12Replacing the paper presser roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

11.13Replacing the lock levers 1/ and /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147

2 vi
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Introduction

Introduction

Revision history

After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement
of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.

When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued
with a revision mark added as required.

Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show to the left of the revised section.
A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made.

• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.

Note:
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
• The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
• The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.

2004/12 3.0 Change of design and correction of errors in writing


2004/04 2.0 Change of design and correction of errors in writing
2003/08 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Service
Date Revision mark Descriptions of revision
manual Ver.

vii
Introduction KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Composition of the service manual

This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:

<Theory of Operation section>


I OUTLINE: System configuration, product specifications, unit configuration, paper
path, drive system, and image creation process *
II UNIT EXPLANATION: Configuration of each unit, explanation of the operating system, and
explanation of the control system
III DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY: Removal/reinstallation method of periodically replaced parts and
major parts.
As information for the CE to have a better understanding of the product, this part outlines the object of each
functions, its role, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing
of the operations of each part, and then explains the removal and reinstallation procedure of the periodically
replaced parts and the major parts.

The contents of * are described only in the service manual of the main body.

<Field service section>


I ADJUSTMENT: General description of items to be adjusted, 25 mode, 36 mode, 47
mode, and other adjustments (mechanical adjustments)
II SERVICE TOOL: Various types of ISW *, and mail remote notification system
III SERVICE: Service schedule, copy materials, service materials, and CE tools *
IV JAM CODE LIST: List of jam codes, causes, operations when a jam occurs, and removal
methods
V ERROR CODE LIST: List of error codes, causes, operations when a warning is issued, and
expected defective parts
VI DIAGRAMS: Parts layout drawing, connector layout drawing, timing chart, and
overall wiring diagram
As information that the CE requires at the job site (customer's premise), this part explains the service sched-
ule and its contents, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.

viii
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Introduction

Notation of the service manual

1. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
(1) IC board: Standard printer
(2) KonicaMinolta 8050/CF5001/bizhub PROC500/8150:
Main body or this machine
(3) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
When the description is made in combination of the OS's mentioned above:
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP

2. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered
trademark of each company.

3. Electrical parts and signals


Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.

Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description


IN
PS
Sensor PS Door PS1 Sensor detection signal
SIG
102 PS
24V Power to drive the solenoid
Solenoid SD DRV
Drive signal
SOL
24V Power to drive the clutch
Clutch CL DRV
Drive signal
SOL
24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1
Motor M
DRV2
Drive signals of two kinds
D1
D2

ix
Introduction KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description


_U
_V
_W
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1

D2
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV Ā
Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
DRV B
Motor, phases A and B control signals
DRV B̄
A
Motor M
/A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S
Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
Ground
PG, P.GND Power ground
DCD Data carrier detection
SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
Serial
DSR, DSET Data set ready
communication
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data

x
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Measures to take in case of an accident

Measures to take in case of an accident

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emer-
gency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be car-
ried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-
site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in "Serious Acci-
dent Report/Follow-up Procedures."

xi
List of major differences KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

List of major differences between the old type and the new type

Classification Old type New type


Material Developer (each Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
color)
Toner (each color) Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
Drum Common to Old type/New type
Registration/ Registration roller Torque limiter not provided Torque limiter provided
ADU/Reverse/ ADU reverse roller Rubber roller Spike roller (metal)
Paper exit (Driven roller is of resin) (Driven roller is of rubber)
Reverse/exit roller /2 Rubber roller Spike roller (metal)
(Driven roller is of resin) (Driven roller is of rubber)
Paper exit roller Normal Surface fluorine-treated
Periodic replace- Every 1,000,000 copies/prints Every 200,000 copies/prints
ment cycle of paper *1
exit roller
Exit paper upper Not provided Provided
face cooling fan
Secondary Secondary transfer White Black
transfer pressure cam Cam distance: Small Cam distance: Large
Spring pressure: Large Spring pressure: Small
Control Printer control Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
board
Printer control pro- Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
gram
Image control pro- Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
gram
Fixing Paper exit roller /Up Resin roller Ceramic coated roller
Paper exit roller / — Every 200,000 copies/prints
Up replacement
cycle

*1 For the old type, the paper exit roller is replaced only when it is provided with a kit against uneven wax.

The discrimination of the old type from the new type is made according to the list of product numbers as
shown below. The judgement is made based on the upper 4-digit alphanumeric characters of the serial num-
ber.
And also in this manual the model name is not given, but only "Old type" and "New type" given.

Product number
Model name
Old type New type
8050 65AE, 65AJ, 65AF, 65AN, 65AK, 65AT, 65AP 65LT, 65LU
CF5001 65BE, 65BF 65LQ
C500 — 65LE, 65LF, 65LJ, 65LN, 65LG
8150 — 65LK, 65LP

2 xii
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 OUTLINE OF SYSTEM

I OUTLINE

I OUTLINE
1. OUTLINE OF SYSTEM

[13]
[14]
[12]

[1]
[11]

[2] [3]
[10]

[12] [5]

[11]
[15] [4]
[6]
[16]*

[8] [9]

[7]

[17]*

8050ma1001

[1] Main body [10] Finisher (New type: FS-513, Old type: FS-
[2] LCT (LT-211/C-208) 115/FN-120)
[3] Printer controller (IP-901) [11] Puncher (New type: PK-507/508, Old type:
[4] Hard disk (HD-106) PK-120/PK-5)
[5] Expansion memory (MU-412: 256MB x 4) [12] Cover sheet feeder (PI-110)
[6] Key counter [13] RADF (DF-319/AFR-20)
[7] TU-109 Connection kit (TU-109 A KIT) [14] Platen cover (CV-131)
[8] Trimmer (TU-109/TMG-3) [15] Built-in printer controller (IP-921)
[9] Finisher [16]* Hard disk (for IP-921)
(New type: FS-606, Old type: FS-215/FN-9) [17]* DC power for printer controller (for IP-921)

* [16] and [17] are packaged in the same kit of [15].

1-1 2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2. 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS


A. Type
I OUTLINE

Type: Console type (floor-mounted type)


Copying method: Tandem intermediate transfer type electrostatic method
Original table: Fixed
Original alignment: Rear left side as reference
Photosensitive material: OPC
Sensitizing method: Laser writing
Paper feed trays: 3 trays method (500 sheets x 3, 80 to 90 g/m2) (400 sheets x 3, 105 g/m2)
Multisheet bypass tray (250 sheets, 80 to 90 g/m2) (200 sheets, 105 g/m2)
LT-211 (2500 sheets, 80 to 90 g/m2) *1
*1 Optional

B. Functions
Original to be copied: Sheet, book, solid object
Maximum original size: A3, or 11 x 17 (303 x 438 mm for non standard)
Copy size (for metric area): Tray 1 to 3: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x
14, 11 x 17, 12 x 18, 13 x 19, wide paper *1
Bypass feed: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x
11R, 11 x 17, 12 x 18, 13 x 19,
wide paper *1
ADU: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x
11R, 11 x 17, 12 x 18, 13 x 19,
wide paper *1
Copy size (for inch area): Tray 1 to 3: 5.5 x 8.5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 14,
11 x 17, 12 x 18, 13 x 19, A3, B4, A4, B5, B5R,
wide paper *1
Bypass feed: 5.5 x 8.5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 14,
11 x 17, 12 x 18, 13 x 19, A3, B4, A4, B5, B5R,
wide paper *1
ADU: 5.5 x 8.5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 14,
11 x 17, 12 x 18, 13 x 19, A3, B4, A4, B5, B5R,
wide paper *1
*1 Wide paper is available up to 330 x 487 mm.

2 1-2
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

Magnification: Fixed magnification (for metric area):


x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.224, x 1.154,
x 0.866, x 0.816, x 0.707, x 0.500

I OUTLINE
Fixed magnification (for inch area):
x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.545, x 1.294, x 1.214,
x 0.786, x 0.773, x 0.647, x 0.500
Special ratio magnification:
3 types
Zoom magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (graduated at increment of
0.1%)
Vertical magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (graduated at increment of
0.1%)
Horizontal magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (graduated at increment of
0.1%)
Warm-up time (for metric area): Less than 420 sec. (at room temperature of 20°C with rated voltage)
Warm-up time (for inch area): Less than 390 sec. (at room temperature of 20°C with rated voltage)
First copy time: Full color: Less than 7.6 sec. (platen mode, life size,
manual density, paper feed tray /1 to /3, plain
paper, without gloss, face up paper exit, A4 or
8.5 x 11)
Monochrome: Less than 7.6 sec. (platen mode, life size,
manual density, paper feed tray /1 to /3, plain
paper, without gloss, face up paper exit, A4 or
8.5 x 11)
Black-and-white: Less than 6.0 sec. (platen mode, life size,
manual density, paper feed tray /1 to /3, plain
paper, without gloss, face up paper exit, A4 or
8.5 x 11)

Continuous copy speed: Full color: 51 sheets/min. (A4, memory copy)


50 sheets/min. (8.5 x 11, memory copy)
Monochrome: 51 sheets/min. (A4, memory copy)
50 sheets/min. (8.5 x 11, memory copy)
Black-and-white: 51 sheets/min. (A4, memory copy)
50 sheets/min. (8.5 x 11, memory copy)
Continuous copy count: 9999 sheets, max. or 9999 copies
Paper exit tray loading capacity: 150 trays (A4), max.
Copy density selection: AE, manual (9 steps)
Resolution: Scan: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Copy: 600 dpi x 600 dpi

1-3 2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

E-RDH memory *2 Standard 128 MB for each color (Y, M, C, K);


Max. 384 MB for each color (Y, M, C, K)
Interface: Serial port (USB Type B), Serial port (RS-232C), RJ45 Ethernet connec-
I OUTLINE

tor, parallel port (based on IEEE 1284), Video interface for IP-901
No. of originals in memory: Full color: Priority in high resolution: 18 faces or more
Priority in smooth tone: 18 faces or more
Priority in high compression: 38 faces or more
Conditions: Original: KC #101/A3 (color)
Density: Manual 5
Mode: Character/picture, printed
original, life size
Memory capacity: Standard 128
MB only loaded
Black-and-white/monochrome:
Priority in high resolution: 101 faces or more
Priority in smooth tone: 101 faces or more
Priority in high compression: 318 faces or more
Conditions: Original: Image electronic insti-
tute FAX #4 chart/A4
Density: Manual 5
Mode: Character/picture, printed
original, life size
Memory capacity: Standard 128
MB only loaded
Job: Job in the mode in which job
memory is not used.
*2 Standard 128MB memory is packaged on the board. So, it cannot be changed for a new one.
Four slots are provided for expansion, and it is possible to install MU-412 (set of 4 256MB).

2 1-4
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

C. Copy paper
Standard specified paper: For full color: KonicaMinolta Color Paper 81.4 g/m2

I OUTLINE
Hammermill Tidal 75 g/m2
For black-and-white: KonicaMinolta J Paper 64 g/m2
Hammermill Laser Color Copy Photo White/
Brightness 96 105 g/m2
Ordinary paper: High quality paper, coated paper and recycled paper of 64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
Special paper *1 Label paper, High quality paper, coated paper and recycled paper of 106
g/m2 to 256 g/m2
*1 Label paper should be fed one at a time by the bypass feed method.
106 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 high-quality paper should be fed one sheet at a time with bypass feed method.
And it should also be fed from the LT-211 (optional). (For coated paper, sheets of 120 g/m2 or more are
recommended.)
For special paper other than 106 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 high-quality paper, coated paper and recycled
paper, double sided copy is not allowed.

D. Machine data
Power source (for metric area): 230 VAC -14% to 10.6% 50 Hz
Power source (for inch area): 208 ~ 240 VAC ± 10% 60 Hz
Power consumption (for metric area): 3450 W max. (Full option)
Power consumption (for inch area): 3600 W max. (Full option)
Weight: Approx. 313kg
Dimensions: 786 mm (W) x 889 mm (D) x 1056 mm (H) with platen cover pro-
vided

E. Maintenance and life


Maintenance: Once every 100,000 copies
Machine service life: 5,000,000 copies or 5 years (whichever earlier)

F. Consumables
Developer: Exclusively for the new type, exclusively for the old type
Toner: Exclusively for the new type, exclusively for the old type
Drum: Common to the new type and the old type (φ60)

G. Operating environment
Temperature: 10°C to 30°C
Humidity: 10% RH to 80% RH

Note:
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.

1-5 2
CENTER CROSS SECTION KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

3. CENTER CROSS SECTION


I OUTLINE

[21] [22] [1]


[2]

[20]
[3]

[19] [4]
[18]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[8]
[9]
[17]

[16]

[15]

[10]
[14]

[13]

[12]

[11] 8050ma1002

[1] Process unit [12] Paper feed tray /3


[2] Developing unit /Y [13] Paper feed tray /2
[3] Developing unit /M [14] Paper feed tray /1
[4] Write unit /Y [15] ADU
[5] Write unit /M [16] Reverse section
[6] Write unit /C [17] Paper exit tray
[7] Developing unit /C [18] Paper exit section
[8] Developing unit /K [19] Transfer belt unit
[9] Write unit /K [20] Image correction unit
[10] Bypass tray [21] Scanner section
[11] Drum [22] CCD unit

1-6
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PAPER PATH

4. PAPER PATH
Front side

I OUTLINE
8050ma1029

1-7
PAPER PATH KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Back side
I OUTLINE

8050ma1030

1-8
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

5. DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM


5.1 Drum drive

I OUTLINE
[2]

[1] 8050ma1003

[1] Drum motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (M14, M15, M16, M17) [2] Drum

1-9
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

5.2 Transfer belt conveyance/pressure drive


I OUTLINE

[9]
[8]
[1]
A
[2]

[3]

[7]
[4]

[6]
[15] [16]

[14]

[13]

[5] [12] [11] [10]

8050ma1004

[1] 1st transfer roller /Y [9] Belt drive roller


[2] Drum [10] While in stand-by (Total release)
[3] 1st transfer roller /M [11] Black-and-white mode
[4] 1st transfer roller /C (Pressure on 1st transfer roller /K only)
[5] 1st transfer roller /K [12] Full color mode (Total pressure)
[6] 1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19) [13] 1st transfer roller /K pressure release arm
[7] Transfer belt [14] Drive coupling
[8] Transfer belt motor (M18) [15] 1st transfer roller /K pressure release cam
[16] 1st transfer roller /Y /M /C pressure release
cam

1-10
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

5.3 Developing drive

I OUTLINE
[1]
[7]

[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] 8050ma1005

[1] Toner collection screw [5] Toner conveyance screw


[2] Toner agitator screw [6] Developing coupling /1
[3] Developing coupling /2 [7] Developing sleeve
[4] Developing motor /Y, /M, /C, /K
(M20, M21, M22, M23)

1-11
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

5.4 Toner supply drive


I OUTLINE

[1]
[12]

[2]

[13]
[11]
[3] C

[10]

[9]

[8]

[7] [4]

[5]
D
B

[6]

[14]

8050ma1006e

[1] Toner supply gear /A (Same shaft as C) [8] Toner supply motor /C (M51)
[2] Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14) [9] Toner bottle motor (M53)
[3] Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15) [10] Toner supply motor /M (M50)
[4] Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16) [11] Toner supply motor /Y (M49)
[5] Toner supply gear /A (Same shaft as D) [12] Toner bottle drive gear
[6] Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17) [13] Toner conveyance screw
[7] Toner supply motor /K (M52) [14] Toner supply screw

1-12
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

5.5 Toner collection drive

I OUTLINE
[7]

[8]

[6]

[1]
[2] [3]
[5]

[4]

8050ma1007

[1] Drum waste toner receiving port [5] Vertical conveyance pipe
[2] Horizontal conveyance screw [6] Belt collection screw
[3] Horizontal conveyance pipe [7] Transfer belt motor (M18)
[4] Paper feed motor (M41) [8] Belt collection drive cam

1-13
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

5.6 Fixing drive


I OUTLINE

[1]

[1]

[2]
FRONT
[7]

[6]

[5]

[4] [3] 8050ma1008

[1] Web motor (M54) [5] Fixing roller /L


[2] Fixing roller /U [6] Fixing motor (M29)
[3] One-way clutch [7] Fixing paper exit roller
[4] Pressure/release cam

1-14
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

5.7 Paper feed drive


5.7.1 Paper feed tray /1 to /3 drive

I OUTLINE
[17] [19] [18] [27] [21] [20]

[15] [16] [23] [24] [26]


[22] [25]

[3] [1]
[6] [4] [2]
[14] [13] [12] [11] [9] [10] [8] [7] [5] 8050ma1009

[1] Pre-registration roller /3 [8] Paper feed roller /3


[2] Pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12) [9] Double feed prevention roller /2
[3] Drive coupling /3 [10] Tray up drive motor /3 (M38)
[4] Paper feed motor (M41) [11] Paper feed roller /2
[5] Double feed prevention roller /3 [12] Tray up drive motor /2 (M39)
[6] Feed roller /3 [13] Double feed prevention roller /1
[7] Paper feed clutch /3 (MC11) [14] Paper feed tray

1-15
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

[15] Up/down wire [22] Feed roller /2


[16] Tray up drive motor /1 (M40) [23] Paper feed clutch /2 (MC9)
I OUTLINE

[17] Paper feed roller /1 [24] Drive coupling /2


[18] Feed roller /1 [25] Pre-registration roller /2
[19] Paper feed clutch /1 (MC7) [26] Pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10)
[20] Pre-registration roller /1 [27] Drive coupling /1
[21] Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8)

1-16
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

5.7.2 Vertical conveyance drive

I OUTLINE
[4]

[1]

[3]

[2]

8050ma1010

[1] Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13) [3] Drive coupling


[2] Paper feed motor (M41) [4] Intermediate conveyance roller /1

1-17 1
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

5.8 ADU drive


5.8.1 Bypass tray drive
I OUTLINE

[6] [7] [2] [8]

[1]

[5] [3]

[4]

8050ma1011

[1] Up/down gear [5] Drive coupling


[2] Paper feed roller /BP [6] Feed roller /BP
[3] Double feed prevention roller /BP [7] Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6)
[4] Paper feed motor (M41) [8] Tray up drive motor /BP (M35)

1-18
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

5.8.2 Registration drive/loop drive

I OUTLINE
[4] [1]

[3] [2] 8050ma1012

[1] Loop roller motor (M31) [3] Registration roller


[2] Loop roller [4] Registration roller motor (M30)

1-19
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

5.8.3 ADU conveyance drive


I OUTLINE

[11]
[15]
[6][7] [8] [9][10] [12] A [13] [14]

[1] [2]

[4] [5]
[18] [16]

[17] [3]

A
8050ma1013

[1] Intermediate conveyance roller /2 [10] ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1)


[2] Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) [11] 2nd transfer section
[3] Paper feed motor (M41) [12] 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (M34)
[4] ADU pre-registration roller [13] Intermediate conveyance roller /3
[5] ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) [14] Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5)
[6] ADU conveyance roller /1 [15] Drive coupling
[7] ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) [16] Transfer belt
[8] Timing belt [17] Pressure arm
[9] ADU conveyance roller /2 [18] 2nd transfer roller

1-20
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

5.8.4 Reverse paper exit drive

I OUTLINE
[1]

[5]

[3]

[4]

[2] 8050ma1014

[1] Reverse gate [4] Reverse/exit roller /2


[2] Reverse/exit motor (M33) [5] Decurler roller
[3] Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)

1-21
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

5.9 Main body paper exit drive


I OUTLINE

[6]

[1]

[2]
[5]

[4] [3] 8050ma1015

[1] Reverse gate [4] Reverse/exit roller /2


[2] Drive coupling [5] Timing belt
[3] Reverse/exit motor (M33) [6] Paper exit roller

1-22
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

5.10 Scanner drive

I OUTLINE
[5]

[4] [1]

FRONT

[3] [2] 8050ma1016

[1] Exposure unit [4] Scanner drive wire /R


[2] Scanner drive wire /F [5] Scanner motor (M1)
[3] V-mirror unit

1-23
IMAGE CREATION PROCESS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

6. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS


6.1 Image creation flow and function
I OUTLINE

Step Process Function


Step 1 Charging process Forms the layer of charges on the photosensitive drum.
Step 2 Laser exposure process Form an electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum.
Step 3 Developing process Makes an electrostatic latent image visible.
Step 4 1st transfer process Forms an image by synthesizing on the transfer belt a mono-
chrome (YMCK) visible image from each photosensitive drum.
Step 5 2nd transfer process Transfers an image on the transfer belt to paper.
Step 6 Separation process Separates paper from the transfer belt after completion of the
transfer of the toner.
Sub step 1 Drum cleaning Removes toner adhered on the surface of the photosensitive
drum after completion of the primary transfer.
Sub step 2 Pre-charging exposure Removes residual potential on the surface against the photosen-
sitive drum after completion of drum cleaning.
Sub step 3 Transfer belt cleaning Removes toner adhered on the surface of the transfer belt after
completion of the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 4 2nd transfer roller /L Remove toner on the 2nd transfer roller /L after completion of the
cleaning 2nd transfer.
Sub step 5 Toner collection Collects toner that has been removed through the drum cleaning
and the transfer belt cleaning. (Not shown in the drawing below.)

[11] [1]
Step 3
Sub step 3 [2]
[12] [4] [3]
Step 2
Step 4
Step 1
Sub step 1
[10]

Sub step 2
[9]
[8]

Step 6 [5]
[6]

[7] Step 5 / Sub step 4 8050ma1017

[1] Developing unit [7] Separation neutralizing section


[2] Write unit [8] 2nd transfer roller /U
[3] Charging corona [9] Transfer belt
[4] Pre-charging exposure lamp (PCL) [10] Blade (drum cleaning)
[5] Paper [11] Blade (transfer belt cleaning)
[6] 2nd transfer roller /L [12] Drum

2 1-24
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

6.2 Charging process (Step 1)


The charging corona, having a gold-plated tungsten wire, is applied with a high DC voltage (minus) to neg-

I OUTLINE
atively charge the surface of the photosensitive drum by wire discharge. The charging corona is provided
with a charging control plate to make charges on the surface of the photosensitive drum uniform. Photo-
sensitive drums are provided for the four colors of Y, M, C and K.

[1]

[2]

[4] [3] 8050ma1018

[1] Drum [3] Charging corona


[2] Charge (negative) [4] Charging control plate

6.3 Laser exposure process (Step 2)


Charges on the surface of the photosensitive drum have a characteristic that when they are irradiated with
light, they are neutralized and vanish. Using this characteristic, a laser beam is irradiated on the image
region to create an image by removing charges on the photosensitive drum. This image is referred to as
an electrostatic latent image. A Laser beam is irradiated on each photosensitive drum of Y, M, C and K cor-
responding to the four color data resolved by the image processing section.

[4]

[3]
[1]

[2] 8050ma1019

[1] Write unit [3] Neutralized section


[2] Laser beam [4] Charge (negative)

1-25
IMAGE CREATION PROCESS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

6.4 Developing process (Step 3)


In the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum, the non-image section is negatively charged
I OUTLINE

and the image section is neutralized. When toner, that is, negatively charged is brought close to the photo-
sensitivity drum, toner is attracted to the image section on the drum by the potential difference with the
developing bias and becomes visible. This process is called developing.

[2] [3] [4]

[1]
8050ma1020

[1] Drum [3] Toner (negative)


[2] Charge (negative) [4] Developing sleeve

1 1-26
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

6.5 1st transfer process (Step 4)


Toner on each drum of Y, M, C and K is transferred onto the transfer belt, this allows for overlapping of the

I OUTLINE
colors. This movement of toner from the drum to the transfer belt is referred to as the 1st transfer, where
the transfer of toner is carried out sequentially in the order of Y, M, C and K.
While in the 1st transfer, the 1st transfer roller provided at the rear of the transfer belt is applied with a high
DC bias voltage (positive). As a result, a positive potential on the surface of the transfer belt is higher than
that of the surface of each drum, and toner moves from the drum to the transfer belt.

[3] [4] [5]

[2]

[1]

[8] [5]

[7]

[6]

8050ma1021

[1] Drum /Y [5] Charge (negative)


[2] 1st transfer roller /Y [6] Drum /M
[3] Transfer belt [7] 1st transfer roller /M
[4] Toner /Y [8] Toner /M

1-27
IMAGE CREATION PROCESS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

6.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5)


The operation to transfer the toner image of the four colors on the transfer belt to paper is referred to as
I OUTLINE

the 2nd transfer. While in the 2nd transfer, the 2nd transfer roller /L provided at the lower section of the
transfer belt conveys paper while pressing it against the transfer belt. At this time, the 2nd transfer roller /U
provided at the rear of the transfer belt is applied with a high DC bias voltage (negative). Toner on the
transfer belt is shifted toward the paper by the electric field formed between the 2nd transfer roller /U and
the 2nd transfer roller /L.

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3] 8050ma1022

[1] Transfer belt [3] 2nd transfer roller /L


[2] Paper [4] 2nd transfer roller /U

6.7 Separation process (Step 6)


While in the 2nd transfer, paper in the process of transfer is negatively charged by the 2nd transfer roller /
U, resulting in an adsorption phenomenon where paper is attracted to the transfer belt. This operation to
peel paper that is thus adsorbed off the transfer belt is referred to as separation.
Separation is made by applying high AC and DC bias voltages to the separation neutralizing section. As a
result the charges of the paper and the transfer belt are neutralized.

[1]

[2]

[4] [3] 8050ma1023

[1] Transfer belt [3] 2nd transfer roller /L


[2] Paper [4] Separation neutralizing section

1-28
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

6.8 Drum cleaning (Sub step 1)


A drum that has completed the 1st transfer has a residual amount of toner that is left from the transfer pro-

I OUTLINE
cess. The process to remove toner is referred to as drum cleaning.
Drum cleaning is made by scraping toner adhered to the drum surface with the edge of a plate called a
blade that is made of urethane rubber.

[3] [1]

[2] 8050ma1024

[1] Drum [3] Residual toner


[2] Cleaning blade

6.9 Pre-charging exposure (Sub step 2)


No toner adhesion is found on the surface of a drum that has completed drum cleaning, but there is a very
small amount of residual potential found. Since a normal charging for the next copy/print cannot be carried
out as it is, exposure other than a laser exposure is made to thoroughly neutralize a potential on the drum
surface. This process is referred to as a pre-charging exposure.
This machine conducts this process by using a pre-charging exposure lamp (PCL).

[1]

[3]
[2] 8050ma1025

[1] Drum [3] Residual charge


[2] Pre-charging exposure lamp (PCL)

1-29
IMAGE CREATION PROCESS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

6.10 Transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 3)


A transfer belt that has completed the 2nd transfer has a residual amount of toner that is left from the
I OUTLINE

transfer process. The process to remove toner is referred to as a transfer belt cleaning.
A transfer belt cleaning is made by scraping toner adhered to the drum surface with the edge of a plate
called a blade that is made of urethane rubber.

[3] [1]

[2]

8050ma1026

[1] Transfer belt [3] Cleaning blade


[2] Residual toner

6.11 2nd transfer roller /L cleaning (Sub step 4)


Residual toner on the transfer belt is in direct contact with the 2nd transfer roller /L. As a result, the 2nd
transfer roller /L may be coated with toner.
So, the 2nd transfer roller /U is applied with a positive and a negative high DC bias voltage alternately to
move toner on the 2nd transfer roller /L to the transfer belt side. The toner on the transfer belt that has
been moved is cleaned by the transfer belt cleaning mentioned above.

[1]

[3]

[2]

[5] [4] 8050ma1027

[1] Transfer belt [4] DC bias (positive) applied


[2] 2nd transfer roller /L [5] DC bias (negative) applied
[3] 2nd transfer roller /U

1-30
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

6.12 Toner collection (Sub step 5)


Toner that was cleaned in the drum cleaning section and the transfer belt cleaning section is collected into

I OUTLINE
the toner collection box through the toner collection screw.

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1]

8050ma1028

[1] Toner collection box [4] Drum /M toner collection opening


[2] Transfer belt toner collection opening [5] Drum /C toner collection opening
[3] Drum /Y toner collection opening [6] Drum /K toner collection opening

6.13 Process speed


In combination of the weighing of paper and the surface finish of an output image, this machine provides
three types of process speeds.

Weighing Without gloss With gloss


64 to 105 g/m2 220 mm/s 110 mm/s (1/2 speed)
2
106 to 256 g/m 110 mm/s (1/2 speed) 73.3 mm/s (1/3 speed)

1-31 2
IMAGE CREATION PROCESS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004
I OUTLINE

Blank page

1-32
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

II UNIT EXPLANATION

1. SCANNER
1.1 Composition

PS1 PS2 [7] [8] M1 CONT

II UNIT EXPLANATION
U
V
W

DRIVE
EM

M2

[1]

SCDB
[2]

[6] PS3 PS4 [5] [4] [3] PRCB


OACB 8050ma2001

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] CCD board (CCDB) Converts an analog signal to a digital signal
[2] DF reset read switch (RS1) Detects whether the platen cover or RADF is closed
Magnet sensor type
[3] CCD unit Converts the read image optoelectronically (600dpi)
3 lines (RGB) linear image sensor
[4] Exposure lamp (L1) The light source for reading an image
Xenon fluorescent lamp (white)
[5] Exposure unit Reads an image
Light source moving slit exposure
• Outgoing: 220 mm/sec (at life-size)
• Backhaul: 802 mm/sec (at life-size)
[6] V-mirror unit Reflects the read light (2nd, 3rd mirror)
[7] Scanner wire Transfers the driving force from M1 to the exposure unit and
the V-mirror unit (front, back)
[8] L1 inverter (L1 INVB) Turns on L1
M1 Scanner motor Drives the scanner wire for moving the exposure unit and the
V-mirror unit
3-phase stepping motor
M2 Scanner cooling fan Cools the scanner section (exhaust)
PS1 Scanner HP sensor Detects the home position for the exposure unit

2-1
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Symbol Name Function or method


PS2 APS timing sensor Detects whether the platen cover or RADF is opened/closed
PS4 APS sensor /L Detects the original size in the sub-scan direction (for large
size)
PS3 APS sensor /S Detects the original size in the sub-scan direction (for small
size)

1.2 Operation
II UNIT EXPLANATION

1.2.1 Home position search in the exposure unit

The exposure units searches for the home position when the sub power switch (SW2) is turned on. The
operation may different depending on the state of the scanner HP sensor.

A. When PS1 is off

[1] [2] [3]

8050ma2002

[1] Home position [3] Platen APS position


[2] PS1

B. When PS1 is on

[1] [2] [3]

8050ma2003

[1] Home position [3] Platen APS position


[2] PS1

1 2-2
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

1.2.2 Shading correction reading

The exposure unit starts the shading correction with the white standard board attached to the platen glass
once it completes the home position search.
In the shading correction operation, the white correction is performed twice and the black correction once.
In the white correction, the white standard board is read while the exposure lamp (L1) is turned on. In the
black correction, the board is read while the lamp is off.
Data for each CCD sensor is read during the both white corrections and each pixel is compared its bright-
ness. The brighter data is regarded as the white correction data.

II UNIT EXPLANATION
The shading correction reading operation may differ between when the sub power switch (SW2) is turned
on and when the start button is turned on.

A. When the sub power switch (SW2) is turned on

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

*1 *2

[7] 8050ma2004

[1] Home position [5] 2nd white correction


[2] PS1 [6] Black correction
[3] Platen APS position [7] Returning the amount moved
[4] 1st white correction

*1 If the platen cover or ADF is closed, the exposure unit stops at the home position.
*2 If the platen cover or ADF is opened, the exposure unit stops at the platen APS position.

B. When the start button is turned on


The basic operation is identical to when the sub power switch (SW2) is turned on; however, when search-
ing the home position after reading the shading correction, the copying operation starts without stopping at
the home position or the platen APS position.

2-3 1
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

1.2.3 Original reading mode

There are two original reading modes, the platen mode and the DF mode. The original reading is a com-
mon operation.

A. When copying with the manual density setting

[1] [2] [3]


II UNIT EXPLANATION

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7] 8050ma2005

[1] Home position [5] 2nd white correction


[2] PS1 [6] Exposure scan
[3] Platen APS position [7] Home position search
[4] 1st white correction

B. When performing the AE copy

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8] 8050ma2006

[1] Home position [5] 2nd white correction


[2] PS1 [6] AE scan
[3] Platen APS position [7] Exposure scan
[4] 1st white correction [8] Home position search

2-4
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

1.2.4 Original reading control

The reflection from the exposed original reaches to the CCD sensor through the lens. The CCD sensor
outputs an electric signal (analog) proportional to the amount of light and then the analog signal is con-
verted to a digital signal in the CCD board (CCDB) according to directions from the overall control board
(OACB).
The CCD sensor includes three separate photo receivers for the 1st colors R, G, and B. The A/D converter
signals for each color are also created separately.

II UNIT EXPLANATION
A. Original reading timing
The original reading timing is same in the platen mode and in the DF mode when AE/ACS has not been
set; however, it is different when AE/ACS has been set.
(1) When AE/ACS has not been set

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7] 8050ma2051

[1] Home position [5] 2nd white correction


[2] PS1 [6] Exposure scan (220 mm/s)
[3] Platen APS position [7] Home position search
[4] 1st white correction

2-5
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

(2) When AE/ACS has been set (the platen mode)

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

[5]

[6]
II UNIT EXPLANATION

[7]

[8] 8050ma2052

[1] Home position [5] 2nd white correction


[2] PS1 [6] AE/ACS scan (429 mm/s)
[3] Platen APS position [7] Exposure scan (220 mm/s)
[4] 1st white correction [8] Home position search

2-6
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

(3) When AE/ACS has been set (the DF mode)

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

[5]

II UNIT EXPLANATION
[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13]

[14] 8050ma2053

[1] Home position [8] Original replacing time


[2] PS1 [9] AE/ACS scan for the 2nd page (429 mm/s)
[3] Platen APS position [10] Exposure scan for the 2nd page (220 mm/s)
[4] 1st white correction [11] Original replacing time
[5] 2nd white correction [12] AE/ACS scan for the last page (429 mm/s)
[6] AE/ACS scan for the 1st page (429 mm/s) [13] Exposure scan for the last page (220 mm/s)
[7] Exposure scan for the 1st page (220 mm/s) [14] Home position search

2-7
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

1.2.5 APS control

The APS control is performed in the printer control board (PRCB) with signals read by the APS sensor /S
(PS3), the APS sensor /L (PS4), and the CCD sensor when the platen cover or RADF is opened/closed.
The signal is sent via the scanner drive board (SCDB) and the overall control board (OACB) (see the DF-
319/AFR-20 service manual for more detailed information on the APS control by DF-319).

A. APS operation
The APS sensor /S (PS3) and the APS sensor /L (PS4) detect the original size in the sub-scan direction
II UNIT EXPLANATION

and the CCD sensor detects the original size in the main scan direction.

B. Relationship between each of the sensors and the original size

Original size CCD sensor PS3 PS4


(Length of detection: mm) (ON/OFF) (ON/OFF)

Smallest 102 OFF OFF

B5R 182 ON OFF

B5 257 OFF OFF

B4 257 ON ON

A4R 210 ON OFF

A4 297 OFF OFF

A3 297 ON ON

8.5 x 11R 215.9 ON OFF

8.5 x 11 279.4 OFF OFF

8.5 x 14 215.9 ON ON

11 x 17 279.4 ON ON

2 2-8
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

C. APS detection timing (platen mode)


The original size in the main scan direction is detected twice. The larger size is regarded as the original
size.

[1] [2]

APS sensor /S (PS3)

APS sensor /L (PS4)

Exposure lamp (L1)

II UNIT EXPLANATION
APS timing sensor (PS2)

DF reset read switch (RS1)


8050ma2009

[1] 1st original size detection [2] 2nd original size detection
(main scan direction, sub-scan direction) (main scan direction)

2-9
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

1.2.6 AE control

The CCD sensor installed on the A/D converter board (ADB) reads the copy density during the AE scan, it
performs the process responsive to the read density on the overall control board (OACB), and then it
selects the most favorable γ correction curve. The CPU on the image processing board (IPB) performs the
selection.

A. AE/ACS sampling range


The AE/ACS sampling range is identical to the read range in both the platen mode and the DF mode.
II UNIT EXPLANATION

[1]

[2]

[1]

[1] [1] 8050ma2054

[1] 10 mm [2] AE/ACS sampling range

1.2.7 Image processing

A. AOC (automatic offset control)


With the circuit in the CCD sensor, AOC automatically adjusts the analog offset voltage from the sensor to
be the lower limit of the A/D converter.

B. AGC (automatic gain control)


GC automatically controls the level of the analog amplification of the CCD sensor output at the shading
white correction to be the higher limit for the A/D converter.

C. Shading correction
(1) Types of the shading correction
• White correction
• Black correction
(2) Execution timing
• At the sub power switch (SW2) ON
• At the start of scan job

1 2-10
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

D. Other image processing


(1) Brightness/density conversion
(2) Text/dot pattern/photo/map judgement
(3) Filtering
(4) Magnification change processing
(5) Error diffusion processing
(6) Data compression/elongation processing
(7) AE
(8) ACS

II UNIT EXPLANATION
(9) Screen processing

2-11
WRITE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2. WRITE
2.1 Composition

A
A
B
B
CONT
CLOCK
II UNIT EXPLANATION

LOCK
TEMP.ER

[23] [24] [25][26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31]

PRCB

[1]
[22] [21] [20] [19]
[18] [17] [16] [2]

[15] [6][5][4][3]
[14] [13] [12] [11]
[10] [9] [8] IPB
[7] 8050ma2010

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Cylindrical lens 1 Corrects the laser path against the angle error in the polygon mirror
[2] Polygon mirror Scans the laser light
Hexahedron, 51,968.51rpm
[3] Polygon motor /Y (M3) Drives the polygon mirror (write unit /Y)
DC brushless motor, PLL control
[4] Polygon motor /M (M4) Drives the polygon mirror (write unit /M)
DC brushless motor, PLL control
[5] Polygon motor /C (M5) Drives the polygon mirror (write unit /C)
DC brushless motor, PLL control
[6] Polygon motor /K (M6) Drives the polygon mirror (write unit /K)
DC brushless motor, PLL control
[7] Temp detection board (TDB) Detects the temperature in the write unit (only installed on the
write unit /K)
[8] Laser correction HP sensor /Y Detects the home position for the cylindrical lens 2 (write unit
(PS5) /Y)*1
[9] Laser correction HP sensor /M Detects the home position for the cylindrical lens 2 (write unit
(PS6) /M)*1
[10] Laser correction HP sensor /C Detects the home position for the cylindrical lens 2 (write unit
(PS7) /C)*1
[11] Index sensor board /Y (INDX Controls the laser writing position in the main scan direction
SB Y) (write unit /Y)
[12] Index sensor board /M (INDX Controls the laser writing position in the main scan direction
SB M) (write unit /M)

2-12
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 WRITE

Symbol Name Function or method


[13] Index sensor board /C (INDX Controls the laser writing position in the main scan direction
SB C) (write unit /C)
[14] Index sensor board /K (INDX Controls the laser writing position in the main scan direction
SB K) (write unit /K)
[15] Index lens Collects the laser light reflected from the index mirror
[16] Laser correction motor /Y (M7) Swing-drives the cylindrical lens 2 (write unit /Y)
[17] Laser correction motor /M (M8) Swing-drives the cylindrical lens 2 (write unit /M)
[18] Laser correction motor /C (M9) Swing-drives the cylindrical lens 2 (write unit /C)

II UNIT EXPLANATION
[19] Write unit /K Write unit for black
[20] Write unit /C Write unit for cyan
[21] Write unit /M Write unit for magenta
[22] Write unit /Y Write unit for yellow
[23] dust-proof glass Keeps dust out from the write unit
[24] fθ lens Makes the laser scan speed uniform against the laser expo-
sure surface on the drum
[25] Cylindrical lens 2 Corrects the laser path against the angle error in the polygon
mirror
[26] Index mirror Reflects the laser light to the index sensor boards /Y, /M, /C, /
K (INDX SB Y, M, C, K)
[27] Laser drive board /Y (LDB Y) Laser light (write unit /Y)
1 chip 1 beam method, 7mW 650nm
[28] Laser drive board /M (LDB M) Laser light (write unit /M)
1 chip 1 beam method, 7mW 650nm
[29] Laser drive board /C (LDB C) Laser light (write unit /C)
1 chip 1 beam method, 7mW 650nm
[30] Laser drive board /K (LDB K) Laser light (write unit /K)
1 chip 1 beam method, 7mW 650nm
[31] Collimator lens Collimates the diffusing laser light

*1 It is not installed on the write unit /K.

2-13
WRITE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2.2 Operation
2.2.1 Image writing

The RGB image data from the CCD sensor is converted into digital data, individually, in the A/D converter
board (ADB) and then, it is sent to the overall control board (OACB). The OACB converts RGB signals to
YMCK signals with the image processing board (IPB). The converted YMCK signals are divided to the
laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K (LDB Y, M, C, K) by the IPB. They are written on the drums for each color
with laser light from the each laser drive board.
II UNIT EXPLANATION

[1] [2]

[3]

8050ma2065

[1] Laser light [3] Drum


[2] Polygon mirror

2.2.2 Color registration correction control

In a black-and-white copier, a transfer image formed on its drum is transferred onto paper directly; how-
ever, in this machine, a color image is split into 4 colors, yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K),
the images for each color are formed on each dedicated drum, they are combined on the transfer belt (1st
transfer), and then the combined image is transferred onto paper (2nd transfer). At the 1st transfer, the
transfer locations for each color must be matched to prevent the color drift. This control is called the color
registration correction control.

2-14
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 WRITE

A. Types of the color registration correction control


There are following 5 color registration correction controls.
The write units are mechanically adjusted in the "Partial horizontal magnification"; however, the correction
is performed electrically in the other four.

Correction type Correction method

Drift in the main Adjusts the write start timing in the main scan direction
scan direction

II UNIT EXPLANATION
Drift in the sub- Adjusts the write start timing in the sub-scan direction
scan direction

Entire horizon- Adjusts the clock frequency at write


tal magnification

Inclination Adjusts the angle of the cylindrical lens 2

Partial horizon- Adjusts the position of the write unit (parallelism


tal magnification against drum)
* See adjusting the timing for the image adjustment in
36 mode

*1 The relationship between 2 colors are shown in the interests of simplicity.


*2 In "drift in the main scan direction", "Entire horizontal magnification", and "Partial horizontal magnifica-
tion", colors are intentionally drifted in the sub-scan direction to make it clear the drift between 2 colors.

2-15
WRITE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

B. Overview of the color registration correction control


In the color registration correction control, the color registration marks for each color are transferred on the
transfer belt in the different transfer area. The locations are detected by the color registration sensor /F
(PS8) and the color registration sensor /R (PS9). This information is used to determine the image drift
amount for each color.
If the amount for a color is beyond the set point, adjust the image write timing, the clock frequency, and the
angle of the cylindrical lens 2 for the corresponding color are adjusted as necessary.
II UNIT EXPLANATION

[13]

[1]
[2]

[12] [3]
[4]

[11]
[5]
[6]

[7]
[10]
[8]

[9]
8050ma2055

[1] Drum /Y [8] Write unit /K


[2] Write unit /Y [9] Transfer belt
[3] Drum /M [10] Direction of image
[4] Write unit /M [11] Color registration sensor /F (PS8)
[5] Drum /C [12] Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
[6] Write unit /C [13] Data processing
[7] Drum /K

2-16
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 WRITE

C. Procedure for the color registration correction control operation


1. Transferring the color registration mark
The color registration marks " " for each color are transferred on the transfer belt in order of black (K),
cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y). They are transferred on the front side and rear side in a line. These
locations are corresponding to the color registration sensor /F (PS8) and the color registration sensor /R
(PS9).

II UNIT EXPLANATION
[7]
[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[6] [5] 8050ma2056

[1] Color registration mark /K [5] Color registration sensor /F (PS8)


[2] Color registration mark /C [6] Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
[3] Color registration mark /M [7] Direction of image
[4] Color registration mark /Y

2-17
WRITE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2. Detecting the color registration mark


PS8 and PS9 detect the edge of the color registration mark " " for each color and convert to digital sig-
nals. The edge detection for one " " is performed at four positions.

[4] [5]

[1]
II UNIT EXPLANATION

[3]

[2] 8050ma2057

[1] Direction of the edge detection (direction of [4] Color registration sensor /F, /R (PS8, PS9)
image) [5] Color registration mark
[2] Binarized digital signals
[3] Detection signal of the color registration sen-
sor /F, /R (PS8, PS9) (analog signal)

2-18
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 WRITE

3. Calculating and correcting the color drift amount


The transfer belt rotates to record the passage time for each color registration mark. The passage time is
determined by the clock signal count corresponding to the detection edge of each registration mark as
shown below. The detected values from PS8 and PS9 are recorded individually.

[1]

II UNIT EXPLANATION
[5]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 [2]

[4]

150 300
[3]
180 330 8050ma2058

[1] Direction of the edge detection (direction of image) [4] Clock signal
[2] Address number of the detected edge [5] Binarized digital signals
[3] Clock signal count value corresponding to
the address for each detected edge

The passage time differences between black (K) and each color are determined from the passage times
detected at above. The time difference is called the color drift amount due to the image write timing. It also
determines the difference between the edge detection timing difference for black (K) and the edge detec-
tion timing differences for each color. It is called the color drift amount due to the angle of the write unit.
The determined value is compared with the set point and then it is corrected to meet the set point.

2-19
WRITE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

D. Operation condition of the color registration correction control


The color registration correction control is performed when:
• Operation condition 1
The color registration automatic correction control is executed in the 36 mode.
Perform the operation when replacing a component described in "3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
FOR 8050" in Field Service.
• Operation condition 2
During warm-up. However, if the fixing temperature at the time when warm-up is started is 70 degrees
or higher, it is not performed.
II UNIT EXPLANATION

• Operation condition 3
The specified number of page is copied/printed.
• Operation condition 4
The copy/print operation has not been performed for a certain time.
• Operation condition 5
A certain change in temperature is detected from the temp detection board (TDB).

Note:
• In case of Operation condition 3, job is temporarily interrupted before the operation.
However, it can be executed after a job by changing the 25 mode dipswitch setting.
• In case of Operation conditions 4 and 5, the operation is executed when the first copy/print is
started after the operation condition is met.

1 2-20
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DRUM UNIT

3. DRUM UNIT
3.1 Composition

[26] U
M14 V
[25] W

[24] [1] PS60

[23] [2]
PS61 DRDB/Y

II UNIT EXPLANATION
[22] M15
1
2
3

PS62
[3]
PS63 DRDB/M
[4]
1
M16 2
3

PS64

PS65 DRDB/C
1
M17 2
[21] 3
[5] [6] [7] [8]
PS66
[27] [28] [29] [30]
[9] [10] [11] [12] PS67 DRDB/K

[13] [14] [15] [16]


[20]
[19]
HV1 PRCB
[18] [17] 8050ma2011

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y) Controls the drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)
[2] Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M) Controls the drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)
[3] Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C) Controls the drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C)
[4] Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K) Controls the drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K)
[5] Developing unit /Y Deposits yellow toner to the transfer image on the drum /Y
See "4. Developing unit."
[6] Developing unit /M Deposits magenta toner to the transfer image on the drum /M
See "4. Developing unit."
[7] Developing unit /C Deposits cyan toner to the transfer image on the drum /C
See "4. Developing unit."
[8] Developing unit /K Deposits black toner to the transfer image on the drum /K
See "4. Developing unit."
[9] Charging /Y Forms a charging potential on the surface of the drum /Y
DC corona discharge (Scotron)
Wire discharge: gold-plated tungsten wire (φ 30µm)
Constant-current method DC output range: -450 to -1100µA
Grid bias: changing control plate
Constant voltage method DC output range: -200 to -850V

2-21
DRUM UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Symbol Name Function or method


[10] Charging /M Forms a charging potential on the surface of the drum /M
DC corona discharge (Scotron)
Wire discharge: gold-plated tungsten wire (φ 30µm)
Constant-current method DC output range: -450 to -1100µA
Grid bias: changing control plate
Constant voltage method DC output range: -200 to -950V
[11] Charging /C Forms a charging potential on the surface of the drum /C
DC corona discharge (Scotron)
II UNIT EXPLANATION

Wire discharge: gold-plated tungsten wire (φ 30µm)


Constant-current method DC output range: -450 to -1100µA
Grid bias: changing control plate
Constant voltage method DC output range: -200 to -950V
[12] Charging /K Forms a charging potential on the surface of the drum /K
DC corona discharge (Scotron)
Wire discharge: gold-plated tungsten wire (φ 30µm)
Constant-current method DC output range: -450 to -1100µA
Grid bias: changing control plate
Constant voltage method DC output range: -200 to -950V
[13] Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y Lowers and uniforms the drum /Y surface potential
(PCL Y) LED
[14] Pre-charging exposure lamp /M Lowers and uniforms the drum /M surface potential
(PCL M) LED
[15] Pre-charging exposure lamp /C Lowers and uniforms the drum /C surface potential
(PCL C) LED
[16] Pre-charging exposure lamp /K Lowers and uniforms the drum /K surface potential
(PCL K) LED
[17] Cleaning blade Cleans the drum
Drum contacting separation method
[18] Toner collection screw Conveys toner from the cleaning section to the toner collection section
Screw method
[19] Grease Assists the drum cleaning ability
Zinc stearate rod
[20] Grease applying brush roller Applies grease to the drum surface
Drum contacting application method by brush
[21] Transfer belt unit YMCK synthetic transfer image formation base
See "5. Transfer belt unit."
[22] Drum /K Transfer image formation base for black
OPC drum (φ 60 mm)
[23] Drum /C Transfer image formation base for cyan
OPC drum (φ 60 mm)
[24] Drum /M Transfer image formation base for magenta
OPC drum (φ 60 mm)
[25] Drum /Y Transfer image formation base for yellow
OPC drum (φ 60 mm)
[26] Process unit Color image formation section
Consists of the developing unit, drum cartridge, and transfer belt unit

2-22
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DRUM UNIT

Symbol Name Function or method


[27] Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) Detects the surface potential of the drum /K
[28] Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) Detects the surface potential of the drum /C
[29] Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M) Detects the surface potential of the drum /M
[30] Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y) Detects the surface potential of the drum /Y
DRDB/Y Drum drive board /Y Drive board for the drum motor /Y (M14)
DRDB/M Drum drive board /M Drive board for the drum motor /M (M15)
DRDB/C Drum drive board /C Drive board for the drum motor /C (M16)
DRDB/K Drum drive board /K Drive board for the drum motor /K (M17)

II UNIT EXPLANATION
M14 Drum motor /Y Drives the drum /Y
M15 Drum motor /M Drives the drum /M
M16 Drum motor /C Drives the drum /C
M17 Drum motor /K Drives the drum /K
PS60 Encoder sensor /Y1 Detects the rotation of the encoder for the drum /Y
Manages the drive of the drum motor /Y (M14)
There are two sensors, PS 60 and PS61, at opposite of the
encoder to cancel the rotational fluctuations due to the eccen-
tricity of the encoder
PS61 Encoder sensor /Y2 Detects the rotation of the encoder for the drum /Y
Manages the drive of the drum motor /Y (M14)
There are two sensors, PS 60 and PS61, at opposite of the
encoder to cancel the rotational fluctuations due to the eccen-
tricity of the encoder
PS62 Encoder sensor /M1 Detects the rotation of the encoder for the drum /M
Manages the drive of the drum motor /M (M15)
There are two sensors, PS 62 and PS63, at opposite of the
encoder to cancel the rotational fluctuations due to the eccen-
tricity of the encoder
PS63 Encoder sensor /M2 Detects the rotation of the encoder for the drum /M
Manages the drive of the drum motor /M (M15)
There are two sensors, PS 62 and PS63, at opposite of the
encoder to cancel the rotational fluctuations due to the eccen-
tricity of the encoder
PS64 Encoder sensor /C1 Detects the rotation of the encoder for the drum /C
Manages the drive of the drum motor /C (M16)
There are two sensors, PS 64 and PS65, at opposite of the
encoder to cancel the rotational fluctuations due to the eccen-
tricity of the encoder
PS65 Encoder sensor /C2 Detects the rotation of the encoder for the drum /C
Manages the drive of the drum motor /C (M16)
There are two sensors, PS 64 and PS65, at opposite of the
encoder to cancel the rotational fluctuations due to the eccen-
tricity of the encoder

2-23
DRUM UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Symbol Name Function or method


PS66 Encoder sensor /K1 Detects the rotation of the encoder for the drum /K
Manages the drive of the drum motor /K (M17)
There are two sensors, PS 66 and PS67, at opposite of the
encoder to cancel the rotational fluctuations due to the eccen-
tricity of the encoder
PS67 Encoder sensor /K2 Detects the rotation of the encoder for the drum /K
Manages the drive of the drum motor /K (M17)
There are two sensors, PS 66 and PS67, at opposite of the
II UNIT EXPLANATION

encoder to cancel the rotational fluctuations due to the eccen-


tricity of the encoder

2-24
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DRUM UNIT

3.2 Operation
3.2.1 Image formation timing

Paper feed motor (M41)


Drum motor /Y (M14)
Drum motor /M (M15)
Drum motor /C (M16)

II UNIT EXPLANATION
Drum motor /K (M17)
Transfer belt motor (M18)
1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19)
2nd transfer pressure/release motor (M34)
Developing motor /Y (M20)
Developing motor /M (M21)
Developing motor /C (M22)
Developing motor /K (M23)
Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y (PCL Y)
Pre-charging exposure lamp /M (PCL M)
Pre-charging exposure lamp /C (PCL C)
Pre-charging exposure lamp /K (PCL K)
Charging /Y (HV1)
Charging /M (HV1)
Charging /C (HV1)
Charging /K (HV1)
Developing bias /Y (DC) (HV1)
Developing bias /M (DC) (HV1)
Developing bias /C (DC) (HV1)
Developing bias /K (DC) (HV1)
Developing bias /Y (AC) (HV1)
Developing bias /M (AC) (HV1)
Developing bias /C (AC) (HV1)
Developing bias /K (AC) (HV1)
1st transfer /Y (HV2)
1st transfer /M (HV2)
1st transfer /C (HV2)
1st transfer /K (HV2)
2nd transfer (HV2)
Separation (HV2)
Guide plate (HV2)
Drum separation claw solenoid (SD1)
V TOP
Paper exit sensor (PS13)

[1] [2] 8050ma2012

[1] Paper feed start [2] 2nd transfer cleaning

2-25
DEVELOPING UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4. DEVELOPING UNIT
4.1 Composition

DRIVE
CLOCK
M20 CW
LOCK
H/L
DRIVE
CLOCK
M21 CW
II UNIT EXPLANATION

LOCK
H/L
DRIVE
CLOCK
M22 CW
LOCK
H/L
DRIVE
CLOCK
M23 CW
LOCK
H/L

HV1
[12][13][14][15] [16]

[8] [9] [10] [11]


[17]
[1]
[2]

[3]
[4] [5] [6] [7] PRCB
8050ma2013

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Conveyance screw Conveyance of developer from the agitator screw to the devel-
oping sleeve
Screw method
[2] Collection screw Conveyance of developer from the scraper magnet roller to the
collection sector
Screw method
[3] Agitator screw Agitation of developer and the conveyance of developer to the
conveyance screw
Screw method
[4] Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Detection of toner density in the developing unit /Y
Y) L detection method
[5] Toner density sensor /M (TDS Detection of toner density in the developing unit /M
M) L detection method
[6] Toner density sensor /C (TDS Detection of toner density in the developing unit /C
C) L detection method
[7] Toner density sensor /K (TDS Detection of toner density in the developing unit /K
K) L detection method
[8] Developing unit /Y Adhesion of yellow toner to the image transferred on the drum
/Y

2-26
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DEVELOPING UNIT

Symbol Name Function or method


[9] Developing unit /M Adhesion of magenta toner to the image transferred on the
drum /M
[10] Developing unit /C Adhesion of cyan toner to the image transferred on the drum /C
[11] Developing unit /K Adhesion of black toner to the image transferred on the drum /K
[12] Developing sleeve /Y Conveyance of developer to the drum /Y surface by means of
magnetic force
Two-component developing method (yellow toner + carrier
Developing bias applied (AC + DC)

II UNIT EXPLANATION
DC output range by constant voltage method: -250 to -650 V
[13] Developing sleeve /M Conveyance of developer to the drum /M surface by means of
magnetic force
Two-component developing method (magenta toner + carrier
Developing bias applied (AC + DC)
DC output range by constant voltage method: -250 to -650 V
[14] Developing sleeve /C Conveyance of developer to the drum /C surface by means of
magnetic force
Two-component developing method (cyan toner + carrier
Developing bias applied (AC + DC)
DC output range by constant voltage method: -250 to -650 V
[15] Developing sleeve /K Conveyance of developer to the drum /K surface by means of
magnetic force
Two-component developing method (black toner + carrier
Developing bias applied (AC + DC)
DC output range by constant voltage method: -250 to -650 V
[16] Developing regulation plate Regulation of the spiking amount of developer on the develop-
ing sleeve
Regulation plate method
[17] Scraper magnet roller Scraping of developer on the developing sleeve
Magnetic adsorption method
HV1 High voltage unit /1 Generation of developing vias /Y, /M, /C and /K
M20 Developing motor /Y Driving of the developing unit /Y
M21 Developing motor /M Driving of the developing unit /M
M22 Developing motor /C Driving of the developing unit /C
M23 Developing motor /K Driving of the developing unit /K

2-27 2
DEVELOPING UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.2 Operation
4.2.1 Flow of developer

Developer in the developing unit, after being agitated by the agitator screw, is supplied to the developing
sleeve by the conveyance screw. At this time, the bristles amount of the developer on the developing
sleeve is regulated by the developing regulation plate. After completion of developing, the developer on
the developing sleeve is collected by the scraper magnet roller to prevent the developer immediately after
completion of developing from mixing with a new developer. This secures the developing follow-up at a
II UNIT EXPLANATION

high rate of printing. Collected developer is returned to the agitator screw by the collection screw. This
allows developer to make a circulation along a defined path.

[4] [5] [6] [7]

[3] [2] [1]


8050ma2014

[1] Agitator screw [5] Developing sleeve


[2] Conveyance screw [6] Scraper magnet roller
[3] Developing regulation plate [7] Collection screw
[4] Drum

4.2.2 Developing control

For details of each operation timing related to developing, see "Image formation timing" in "3. Drum unit."

4.2.3 Toner supply control to the developing unit

Each of the TDS Y, M, C and K (toner density sensors /Y, /M, /C and /K) uses the L detection method (per-
meability detection of the developer) to detect the toner density of the developer. A value thus obtained is
compared with the reference value of the toner density stored in the CPU on the printer control board
(PRCB) to check to see if the toner needs to be supplied. (For toner supply operation, see "6. Toner sup-
ply.")

2-28
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DEVELOPING UNIT

4.2.4 Developing bias control

A. Control path
The developing bias /Y, /M, /C and /K are supplied from the high voltage unit /1 (HV1) and controlled by the
printer control board (PRCB). Each developing bias is supplied with AC + DC to secure the uniformity of
developing.

4.2.5 Durability of the developer

II UNIT EXPLANATION
A. Concept of the durability of the developer
The durability (deterioration) of the developer depends on the developing sleeve drive distance (the mov-
ing distance of the developing sleeve surface) in the developing unit.
The developing sleeve drive distance includes the distance at idle time (the time when the developing
sleeve does not perform the developing operation but rotates) and the job output pattern has a significant
effect on it.
The idle time has a significant effect on the drive distance in such cases as followings.
• Continuous copy count in a job: the rate of the idle time increases if the continuous copy count is
small.
• Switching the processing speed in a job: There is the idle time at switching the processing speed.
• Switching mode in ACS: There is the idle time at switching between the color mode and the black and
white mode.
• The color mode operation of the black and white original in ACS: There is the idle time for the color
developing sleeves when the black and white original is printed in the color mode.
• Double-sided operation: The operation is circulated in set of 4 sheets if the paper size is A4 If the copy
count is not an integral multiple of 4, for example if it is 9, only 1 sheet is circulated for the operation,
so the idle time is increased.
The relationship between the drive distance and actual copy/print count is affected by those output pat-
terns and it is hard to be defined. The count could be significantly different even if the drive distance is
same.

B. Specification of the durability of the developer


The durability of the drive distance for all color is specified as below.
Durability: 83,000km/color
As described in the previous section, the relationship between the drive distance and actual copy/print
count is hard to be defined; however, 83,000km of drive distance corresponds to 100,000 copies/prints if 5
sheets are printed intermittently in the A4 single-sided copy mode as defined for the maintenance.

2-29
TRANSFER BELT UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

5. TRANSFER BELT UNIT


5.1 Composition

DRIVE
CLOCK
M18 CW
LD

[8]
H/L

PS69
[9]
[7] [1] PS68
II UNIT EXPLANATION

[10]

[11] C REG/1

[2] C REG/2

PS15
[3] A
M19 A

[6] B
B

[12] HV2
[13]
SD1 DRIVE
PRCB
[6] [5] [14] [5] [4] 8050ma2015

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] 1st transfer roller /Y Transfer of images from the drum /Y to the transfer belt (1st
transfer)
Roller transfer method with constant current DC bias applied
DC output range by the constant current method: 5 to 50µA
[2] 1st transfer roller /M Transfer of images from the drum /M to the transfer belt (1st
transfer)
Roller transfer method with constant current DC bias applied
DC output range by the constant current method: 5 to 50µA
[3] 1st transfer roller /C Transfer of images from the drum /C to the transfer belt (1st
transfer)
Roller transfer method with constant current DC bias applied
DC output range by the constant current method: 5 to 50µA
[4] 1st transfer roller /K Transfer of images from the drum /K to the transfer belt (1st
transfer)
Roller transfer method with constant current DC bias applied
DC output range by the constant current method: 5 to 50µA
[5] Transfer belt Image creation for paper transfer
Semiconductor polyimide film
[6] Separation claw unit Paper separation assist from the transfer belt
Pressure/release method by the transfer belt separation claw
solenoid (SD1)
[7] Belt cleaning unit Cleaning and collection of toner on the transfer belt
[8] Belt cleaning blade Cleaning of the transfer belt
Transfer belt contact/separation method

2-30
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TRANSFER BELT UNIT

Symbol Name Function or method


[9] Toner guide roller Scraping and collection of toner on the transfer belt
[10] Toner collection screw Conveys toner from the belt cleaning section to the toner col-
lection section
Screw method
[11] Image correction unit Detection of variety of information of images transferred on
the transfer belt
[12] Transfer belt separation claw Paper separation assist from the transfer belt
Pressure/release method by the transfer belt separation claw

II UNIT EXPLANATION
solenoid (SD1)
[13] 2nd transfer roller /U Toner transfer from the transfer belt to paper
Constant current DC bias applied roller method
DC output range by constant current method: +30 to -120µA
[14] 2nd transfer roller /L Toner transfer from the transfer belt to paper
(Provided on ADU side) Pressure/release mechanism by means of cam
Driven idly by the transfer belt
M18 Transfer belt motor Driving of the transfer belt
DC brushless motor, PLL control
M19 1st transfer pressure/release Pressure/release of the 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K
motor Stepping motor
SD1 Transfer belt separation claw Pressure/release of the separation claw
solenoid 24VDC drive
PS15 1st transfer HP sensor Pressure/release mechanism of the 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K
Home position detection
PS68 Encoder sensor/belt 1 Detection of the rotation of encoder for the transfer belt drive
shaft
Drive control of the transfer belt motor (M18)
2 sensors of the PS68 and PS69 are provided at the opposite
position of the encoder to cancel the change of rotation
caused by the eccentricity of the encoder.
PS69 Encoder sensor/belt 2 Detection of the rotation of encoder for the transfer belt drive
shaft
Drive control of the transfer belt motor (M18)
2 sensors of the PS68 and PS69 are provided at the opposite
position of the encoder to cancel the change of rotation
caused by the eccentricity of the encoder.

2-31 2
TRANSFER BELT UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Transfer belt pressure/release mechanism

The 1st transfer roller that presses the transfer belt against the drum is made up of the 1st transfer rollers /
Y, /M and /C for the drums /Y, /M and /C and the 1st transfer roller /K for the drum /K. The 3 1st transfer
rollers /Y, /M and /C of these rollers operate as a unit (color 1st transfer roller assembly).
When the 1st transfer is made from the drum to the transfer belt, the color 1st transfer roller assembly and
the 1st transfer roller /K push out the transfer belt from the inside and press it against the drum, by means
II UNIT EXPLANATION

of the cam that is driven by the 1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19).
The form of pressure varies with the copy mode. In the full color mode, both of the color 1st transfer roller
assembly and the 1st transfer roller /K are pressed. However in the black-and-white mode, only the 1st
transfer roller /K is pressed.
The release condition is detected by the 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15). The cam drive postion which var-
ies with the copy mode is controlled by the drive amount of the M19 which starts when the PS15 turns off.

[18] [8]
[9]

[10]
[17]

[16]

[15]
[11]
[6] [7]
[14]
[5]

[12] [4]

[3] [2] [1]


[13]
8050ma2016

[1] When totally released [10] Drum /M


[2] When in the black-and-white mode [11] Drum /C
[3] When in the full color mode [12] Drum /K
[4] 1st transfer roller /K pressure release arm [13] 1st transfer roller /K
[5] Drive coupling [14] 1st transfer roller /C
[6] 1st transfer roller /K pressure release cam [15] 1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19)
[7] 1st transfer roller /C pressure release cam [16] Color 1st transfer roller assembly
[8] Drum /Y [17] 1st transfer roller /M
[9] Transfer belt [18] 1st transfer roller /Y

2-32
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TRANSFER BELT UNIT

5.2.2 Image correction unit

A. Composition

[5] [6] [7] [8]

II UNIT EXPLANATION
[4] [3] [2] [1]
DRIVE
DRIVE
PRCB
8050ma2017

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Gamma sensor shutter solenoid (SD3) Open/close of the image density sensor shutter
24VDC drive
[2] Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2) Open/close of the color registration sensor shutters /F and /R
24VDC drive
[3] Gamma sensor shutter Prevention of contamination of the Dmax sensor (PS10) and
the Gamma sensor (PS11)
Open/close method by means of the image density sensor
shutter solenoid (SD3)
[4] Gamma sensor (PS11) Detection of the maximum density and the gamma characteris-
tics of the patch image on the transfer belt
[5] Color registration sensor /F (PS8) Detection of the transfer image position on the front side in the
direction of the main scan
[6] Color registration sensor shutter /F Prevention of contamination of the color registration sensor /F
(PS9)
[7] Color registration sensor shutter /R Prevention of contamination of the color registration sensor /R
(PS9)
[8] Color registration sensor /R (PS9) Detection of the transfer image position on the rear side in the
direction of the main scan

B. Shutter mechanism
The image correction unit is provided with a shutter mechanism that allows the sensor to be exposed only
when necessary to prevent the contamination of various types of sensors.
The color registration sensor shutters /F and /R that protect the color registration sensors /F and /R (PS8
and PS9) are opened and closed by the color registration shutter solenoid (SD2). And also, the image den-
sity sensor shutter that protects the gamma sensor (PS11) is opened and closed by the image density sen-
sor shutter solenoid (SD3).

2-33
TRANSFER BELT UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

5.2.3 1st transfer control

Toner on the drum is transferred onto the transfer belt side by a bias value applied on the 1st transfer roller
provided inside the transfer belt.
The DC bias value of the 1st transfer roller changes according to the following conditions:
• Process speed
• Black-and-white mode or color mode
• Humidity
• No. of use counts of the 1st transfer roller
II UNIT EXPLANATION

• Use count number of developer

For each operation timing of the 2nd transfer control, see "Image formation timing" in "3. Drum unit."

5.2.4 2nd transfer control


Toner on the transfer belt is transferred onto the paper, which is pressed between the transfer belt and the
2nd transfer roller /L on the ADU side, is being sent.
The 2nd transfer roller /U is positioned inside the transfer belt directory above the 2nd transfer roller /L,
and applied with a DC bias value according to the following conditions:
• Process speed
• Black-and-white mode or color mode
• Humidity
• Type of copy paper
• Front or rear side of paper

For each operation timing of the 2nd transfer control, see "Image formation timing" in "3. Drum unit."

5.2.5 Control for the prevention of the flipping of the belt cleaning blade
As countermeasures against the flipping of the belt cleaning blade and the occurrence of white stripes, the
toner band is periodically created on the transfer belt.
When the DIPSW 20-4 is set to "1" for the creation of the toner band, the control is made so that more
toner is supplied at both end of the belt cleaning blade.

5.2.6 Control against belt filming


Lubricant contained in the toner adheres to the transfer belt, and there may occur poor images such as
white stripes.
Therefore, toner is stored between the belt cleaning blade and the toner guide roller to grind regularly the
surface of the belt, thus preventing lubricant from adhering to the transfer belt.

2 2-34
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TONER SUPPLY

6. TONER SUPPLY
6.1 Composition

[11] [10] [12] [13] [14][15] [16]


PS14

DRIVE
DRIVE
A
A
B

II UNIT EXPLANATION
B
A
A
B
B
DRIVE
CLOCK
CW/CCW
LD
H/L
A
A
B
B
A
A
B
B
DRIVE
[9] [8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] DRIVE PRCB
DRIVE
EM TSDB 8050ma2018

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16) Transmission of driving force from the toner bottle motor (M53)
to the toner bottle clutch /C
24VDC drive
[2] Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17) Transmission of driving force from the toner bottle motor (M53)
to the toner bottle /K
24VDC drive
[3] Toner bottle motor (M53) Driving of the toner bottles /Y, /M, /C, /K and driving of the toner
conveyance screw for each color
[4] Toner supply motor /K (M52) Driving of the toner supply screw
Stepping motor
[5] Toner supply motor /C (M51) Driving of the toner supply screw
Stepping motor
[6] Toner supply motor /M (M50) Driving of the toner supply screw
Stepping motor
[7] Toner level detection sensor /K (TLD K) Detection of the toner level in the toner hopper section /K
(Detection is made at the remaining quantity of about 50 g)
Toner bottle capacity: Approx. 690 g
[8] Toner level detection sensor /C (TLD C) Detection of the toner level in the toner hopper section /C
(Detection is made at the remaining quantity of about 50 g)
Toner bottle capacity: Approx. 460 g
[9] Charging intake fan (M48) Cooling around charging /Y, /M, /C, /K
Sirocco fan
[10] Toner supply interlock switch (MS2) 24VDC power line for MC13, MC14, MC15 and MC16 (toner bottle
clutch /Y, /M, /C and /K) is shut off when the toner supply door is open
[11] Toner supply door open/close Toner supply door open/close detection
sensor (PS54)

2-35
TONER SUPPLY KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Symbol Name Function or method


[12] Toner level detection sensor /M Detection of the toner level in the toner hopper section /M
(TLD M) (Detection is made at the remaining quantity of about 50 g)
Toner bottle capacity: Approx. 460 g
[13] Toner level detection sensor /Y Detection of the toner level in the toner hopper section /Y
(TLD Y) (Detection is made at the remaining quantity of about 5 g)
Toner bottle capacity: Approx. 460 g
[14] Toner supply motor /Y (M49) Driving of the toner supply screw
Stepping motor
II UNIT EXPLANATION

[15] Toner bottle clutch /M (MC14) Transmission of driving force from the toner bottle motor (M53)
to the toner bottle /M
24VDC drive
[16] Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC13) Transmission of driving force from the toner bottle motor (M53)
to the toner bottle /Y
24VDC drive
PS14 Toner supply unit open/close sensor Toner supply unit open/close detection

6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Toner supply control to the toner hopper section

A. Toner supply operation


When the toner level detection sensors /Y, /M, /C and /K (TLD /Y, /M, /C, /K) detect the toner level of about
50g in the toner hopper section, the toner bottle motor (M53) and the toner bottle clutches /Y, /M, /C and /
K (MC13, MC14, MC15 and MC16) turn on and rotate the toner bottle to supply a new toner to the toner
hopper section.

B. No-toner display on the operation LCD


When the toner level detection sensors /Y, /M, /C and /K (TLD /Y, /M, /C, /K) detect the toner level of about
50 g and no toner is supplied to the toner hopper section even after the toner supply operation above is
made, it is considered that no toner is left in the bottle. And a no-toner message is shown on the operation
LCD.

6.2.2 Toner supply control to the developing unit

A. When power on
Each of the toner density sensors /Y, /M, /C and /K (TDS Y, /M, /C and /K) detects the toner density in each
developing unit the specified period of time after the sub power switch (SW2) is turned on. When a value
detected at this time is below the reference value of the toner density that is stored in the CPU on the
printer control board (PRCB), the toner supply motors /Y, /M, /C and /K (M49, M50, M51 and M52) are
turned on to supply toner up to the specified density.

B. While in the copy/print operation


While in the copy/print operation, each of the toner density sensors /Y, /M, /C and /K (TDS Y, /M, /C and /K)
monitors the toner density. The output voltage of each of TDS Y, /M, /C and /K determines the length of the
toner supply time which is activated by turning on each of the toner supply motors /Y, /M, /C and /K (M49,
M50, M51 and M52) so that it becomes the reference value of the toner density.

1 2-36
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TONER SUPPLY

6.2.3 Copy/print operation stop control due to no toner

After the no-toner display is shown on the operation LCD, the consumption of about 50g of remaining toner
in the toner hopper is detected by the length of time during which the toner supply motor has been driven.
When it is determined by the length of time during which the toner supply motor has been driven that there
is no remaining toner in the toner hopper, the copy/print operation is stopped according to the setting of
DIPSW 1-2/1-3 of the 25 mode.
However, according to the setting of DIPSW 1-2/1-3 of the 25 mode, when the toner density in the devel-
oping unit is below the specified value while in the stop operation, the copy/print operation will stop imme-

II UNIT EXPLANATION
diately after paper in the machine is ejected.

2-37
TONER COLLECTION KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

7. TONER COLLECTION
7.1 Composition

[9] DRIVE

[8]
CLOCK
M18 F/R
LOCK
H/L

[10]
II UNIT EXPLANATION

[7]
[11]
[6]

DRIVE
[12] CLOCK
M41 F/R
LOCK
H/L

[5] [13] [14] [15]


[1]

PRCB

[2]

[4]

[3]

8050ma2019

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Waste toner door PS (PS53) Open/close detection of the toner collection door, presence/
absence detection of the toner collection box
[2] Waste toner discharge exit Discharge exit of waste toner for the toner collection box
[3] Toner collection box Waste toner collection container
Capacity: 7.0 liters, max.
[4] Waste toner full sensor (PS52) Toner collection box full detection (Detectin made at about 5.6
liters.)
[5] Vertical conveyance pipe Vertical conveyance of waste toner
[6] Toner rocking plate Toner conveyance in the vertical conveyance pipe
Cam drive method
[7] Belt collection pipe Conveyance of waste toner from the transfer belt unit
[8] Belt waste toner receiving port Receiving port of waste toner from the transfer belt unit

2-38
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TONER COLLECTION

Symbol Name Function or method


[9] Belt collection screw Waste toner conveyance from the belt waste toner receiving
port to the upper section of the vertical conveyance pipe
Screw method
[10] Drum /Y waste toner receiving port Waste toner receiving port from the drum /Y
[11] Drum /M waste toner receiving port Waste toner receiving port from the drum /M
[12] Drum /C waste toner receiving port Waste toner receiving port from the drum /C
[13] Drum /K waste toner receiving port Waste toner receiving port from the drum /K
[14] Horizontal conveyance screw Waste toner conveyance from the lower section of the vertical

II UNIT EXPLANATION
conveyance pipe to the waste toner discharge exit
Screw method
[15] Horizontal conveyance pipe Waste toner conveyance from the vertical conveyance pipe to
the toner collection box
M18 Transfer belt motor See "2.5 Transfer belt unit."
M41 Paper feed motor See "2.8 Paper feed trays 1 to 3."

7.2 Operation
7.2.1 Toner collection control

Since the toner collection section is driven by the transfer belt motor (M18)and the paper feed motor
(M41), its control depends on the transfer belt drive and the paper feed drive.

7.2.2 Waste toner full detection control

When the waste toner full sensor (PS5) is kept on for a specified period of time, it is considered that the
toner collection box is full with waste toner, and a message is shown on the operation LCD.

2-39
PAPER FEED TRAY /1 TO /3 KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

8. PAPER FEED TRAY /1 TO /3


8.1 Composition

DRIVE
PS31 PS30 PS29 CLOCK
MC7 M41 CW
LOCK
PS37 H/L
PS36 SD7 DRIVE
[11] [12] [13] [14] [15] PS35 PS32
II UNIT EXPLANATION

MC8
PS33

PS34
MC9
M40 VR1
SD8 DRIVE
[10]
PS38
MC10
PS39
[1]
PS40
[9] MC11
[2] VR2
SD9 DRIVE

PS44
MC12
[8] PS45

PS46

VR3

DRIVE
[7] DRIVE

M39 DRIVE
PRCB
[6] [5] [4] M38 [3] PS43 PS42 PS41 8050ma2047

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Pre-registration roller /2 Conveyance of the tray /2 paper and the paper stopper plate
for the correction of paper skew
[2] Pre-registration roller /3 Conveyance of the tray /3 paper and the paper stopper plate
for the correction of paper skew
[3] Double feed prevention roller /3 Double feed prevention of the tray /3 paper, Torque limiter
[4] Feed roller /3 Feed of the tray /3 paper
[5] Paper feed roller /3 Paper feed of the Tray /3 paper
[6] Double feed prevention roller /2 Double feed prevention of the tray /2 paper, Torque limiter
[7] Paper feed roller /2 Paper feed of the tray /2 paper
[8] Up/down plate /3 Tray /3 paper stacking section
Up/down function provided
Maximum tray capacity: Up to 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
[9] Up/down plate /2 Tray /2 paper stacking section
Up/down function provided
Maximum tray capacity: Up to 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
[10] Up/down plate /1 Tray /1 paper stacking section
Up/down function provided
Maximum tray capacity: Up to 500 sheets (80 g/m2)

1 2-40
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PAPER FEED TRAY /1 TO /3

Symbol Name Function or method


[11] Feed roller /2 Feed of the tray /2 paper
[12] Double feed prevention roller /1 Double feed prevention of the tray /1 paper
[13] Paper feed roller /1 Paper feed of the tray /1 paper
[14] Feed roller /1 Feed of the tray /1 paper
[15] Pre-registration roller /1 Conveyance of the tray /1 paper and the paper stopper plate
for the correction of paper skew
M41 Paper feed motor Driving of the paper feed system
24VDC drive, DC brushless motor, PLL control

II UNIT EXPLANATION
M38 Tray up drive motor /3 Driving of the up/down plate /3
24VDC drive, DC burshless motor
M39 Tray up drive motor /2 Driving of the up/down plate /2
24VDC drive, DC burshless motor
M40 Tray up drive motor /1 Driving of the up/down plate /1
24VDC drive, DC burshless motor
MC7 Paper feed clutch /1 Transmission of the driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the paper feed roller /1
24VDC drive
MC8 Pre-registration clutch /1 Transmission of the driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the pre-registration roller /1
24VDC drive
MC9 Paper feed clutch /2 Transmission of the driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the paper feed roller /2
24VDC drive
MC10 Pre-registration clutch /2 Transmission of the driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the pre-registration roller /2
24VDC drive
MC11 Paper feed clutch /3 Transmission of the driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the paper feed roller /3
24VDC drive
MC12 Pre-registration clutch /3 Transmission of the driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the pre-registration roller /3
24VDC drive
SD7 Pick-up solenoid /1 Transmission of the driving force of the tray /1 paper feed
SD8 Pick-up solenoid /2 Transmission of the driving force of the tray /2 paper feed
SD9 Pick-up solenoid /3 Transmission of the driving force of the tray /3 paper feed
PS29 Pre-registration sensor /1 Detection of paper conveyance at the pre-registration roller /1 entrance
PS30 Tray upper limit sensor /1 Detection of the upper limit of the tray /1 paper
PS31 No paper sensor /1 Detection of the presence of the tray /1 paper
PS32 Remaining paper sensor /1 Detection of the remaining paper in the tray /1
PS33 Paper size /S1 Detection of the paper size along the length of the tray /1
PS34 Paper size /L1 Detection of the paper size along the length of the tray /1
PS35 Pre-registration sensor /1 Detection of paper conveyance at the pre-registration roller /2 entrance
PS36 Tray upper limit sensor /2 Detection of the upper limit of the tray /2 paper
PS37 No paper sensor /2 Detection of the presence of the tray /2 paper
PS38 Remaining paper sensor /2 Detection of the remaining paper in the tray /2
PS39 Paper size /S2 Detection of the paper size along the length of the tray /2

2-41
PAPER FEED TRAY /1 TO /3 KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Symbol Name Function or method


PS40 Paper size /L2 Detection of the paper size along the length of the tray /2
PS41 Pre-registration sensor /3 Detection of paper conveyance at the pre-registration roller /3 entrance
PS42 Tray upper limit sensor /3 Detection of the upper limit of the tray /3 paper
PS43 No paper sensor /3 Detection of the presence of the tray /3 paper
PS44 Remaining paper sensor /3 Detection of the remaining paper in the tray /3
PS45 Paper size /S3 Detection of the paper size along the length of the tray /3
PS46 Paper size /L3 Detection of the paper size along the length of the tray /3
VR1 Paper size VR/1 Detection of the paper size along the width of the tray /1
II UNIT EXPLANATION

VR2 Paper size VR/2 Detection of the paper size along the width of the tray /2
VR3 Paper size VR/3 Detection of the paper size along the width of the tray /3

8.2 Operation
Since the composition and the operation of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 are the same, the explanation is
given of the paper feed tray /1 only. The paper feed trays /2 and /3 are the same as the paper feed tray /1.
The intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) and the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13) are not
used in the paper feed control in the paper feed tray /1.

8.2.1 Paper feed control

[1]

Paper feed motor (M41)

Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7)

Paper feed clutch /1 (MC7)

Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8)

Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29)

Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27)

Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13)

[2] [3] 8050ma2048

[1] START button (ON) [3] 2nd sheet pre-registration loop


[2] 1st sheet pre-registration loop

2-42
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PAPER FEED TRAY /1 TO /3

8.2.2 Up/down plate control

The up/down plate in the paper feed tray is driven by the wire.
When the paper feed tray /1 is set to the main body, the tray up drive motor /1 (M40) of the main body
starts to rotate. As a result, the wire is wound around the drive pulley and the up/down plate goes up.
When the tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) detects the upper limit of paper, the M40 turns off. When the
amount of paper gets reduced as a result of the passage of paper, a no paper detection is made by the
PS30. At this time, the M40 keeps on until the PS30 detects the upper limit of paper again. Accordingly,
paper is lifted up to the fixed level at all times.

II UNIT EXPLANATION
When the paper feed tray /1 is pulled out, the coupling is released from the drive section and the up/down
plate goes down by its own weight.

2-43
PAPER FEED TRAY /1 TO /3 KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

8.2.3 Remaining paper detection control

The amount of remaining paper is detected by the remaining paper sensor /1 (PS32). As the amount of
paper in the tray is getting reduced, the actuator provided at the front of the tray rotates gradually. The
PS32 turns on and off each time a slit in the actuator passes through. The main body control section
counts the number of on/off's of the PS9 after the installation of the tray to detect the amount of remaining
paper in 4 steps.
The detection of no paper is made by the no paper sensor /1 (PS31).
II UNIT EXPLANATION

No. of the slit counts Remaining paper in the tray Indication of remaining amount
on the operation board

0 100 to 75% 4 lit

1 75 to 50% 3 lit

2 50 to 25% 2 lit

3 25 to 0% 1 lit

[2] [1]

[3]

[6] [5] [4] 8050ma2049

[1] Rotational direction when the up/down plate goes up [4] Slit 2
[2] Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS32) [5] Slit 3
[3] Slit 1 [6] Actuator

2-44
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PAPER FEED TRAY /1 TO /3

8.2.4 Paper size detection control

The main scan direction is detected by the resistance value of the paper size VR/1 (VR1) of the bottom of
the paper feed tray.
The sub-scan direction is detected in the combination of the on/off of the paper size /S1 (PS33) of the up/
down plate and the paper size /L1 (PS34).

Paper size Paper size /S Paper size /L Paper size VR

13 x 19R { { 333.2

II UNIT EXPLANATION
12.6 x 18R/17.7R { { 317.0

A3 wide { { 307.4

12 x 18R { { 292.8

A3R { 280.4

A4 280.4

8.5 x 11R 252.4

11 x 17R { 252.4

8K { 235.8

16K 235.8

B4R { 216.7

B5 216.7

8.5 x 14R { 151.3

8.5 x 11R 151.3

A4R 141.9

F4 { 151.3

B5R 97.3

A5R 43.2

8.5 x 5.5R 30.0

{: Sensor on VR: VR angle

2-45
BYPASS FEED KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

9. BYPASS FEED
9.1 Composition

DRIVE
CLOCK
MC6 M41 F/R
LOCK
H/L

SD5
II UNIT EXPLANATION

PRCB

DRIVE

M35 1
2

CVDB

[9] [8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 8050ma2020

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Paper size/LBP (PS49) Paper size detection along the length of the bypass tray
[2] No paper sensor/BP (PS47) Detection of the presence of the bypass feed paper
[3] Paper size/SBP (PS48) Assistance of paper size detection along the width of the
bypass tray
[4] Paper size/VR/BP (VR4) Paper size detection along the width of the bypass tray
[5] Paper feed roller/BP Paper feed
[6] Double feed prevention roller/BP Double feed prevention of paper, Torque limiter
[7] Feed roller/BP Feeding of paper
[8] Tray upper limit sensor/BP (PS25) Bypass tray paper upper limit detection
[9] Bypass conveyance sensor Bypass exit paper conveyance detection
(PS26)
M41 Paper feed motor See "8. Paper feed tray 1 to 3."
M35 Tray up drive motor/BP Bypass tray up/down plate drive
DC motor with brush
MC6 Paper feed clutch/BP Transmission of the bypass tray paper feed power
SD5 Pick-up solenoid/BP Transmission of the bypass tray paper feed power

2-46
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 BYPASS FEED

9.2 Operation
9.2.1 Tray up drive control

When Pick-up solenoid/BP (SD5) turns on after the paper feed motor (M41) turns on, the up/down plate is
raised with paper going up.
When pulling out ADU, coupling comes off the drive section and the up/down plate comes down by its own
weight.

II UNIT EXPLANATION
9.2.2 Paper feed control

[1]

Paper feed motor (M41)

Pick-up solenoid/BP (SD5)

Paper feed clutch/BP (MC6)

Bypass conveyance sensor (PS26)

8050ma2021

[1] START button (ON)

9.2.3 Paper size detection control

The paper size in the bypass tray is detected along the length by the paper size/SBP (PS48) and the
paper size/LBP (PS49), and along the width by the paper size VR/BP (VR4).

2-47
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

10. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE


10.1 Composition

DRIVE
CLOCK
MC13 M41 CW
LOCK
H/L
II UNIT EXPLANATION

PRCB

[1]
[2]

PS50

PS51

8050ma2050

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Vertical conveyance door Cleaning paper jam in the vertical conveyance section
[2] Intermediate conveyance roller /1 Paper conveyance of the trays /2 and /3
M41 Paper feed motor See "8. Paper feed tray 1 to 3."
MC13 Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 Transmission of driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the intermediate conveyance roller /1
24VDC drive
PS50 Vertical conveyance sensor Paper detection in the vertical conveyance section
PS51 Vertical conveyance door sensor Open/close detection of the vertical conveyance door

10.2 Operation
10.2.1 Vertical conveyance control

For operation timing of the vertical conveyance control, see "8. Paper feed tray /1 to /3."

2-48
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

11. REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT


11.1 Composition

PS24
[4] PS13 [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]

II UNIT EXPLANATION
[21]

PS12 PS55
[12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] PS27 [20]

PS19

PS28

[3] PS20 [2] [1] PS22 PS23

MC2
PS21 MC1 MC3 MC5 MC4
PS24

SD4

HV2 M33 M32 M30 M31 M41 M34


A
A
B
B

A
A
B
B

A
A
B
B

A
A
B
B

DRIVE
CLOCK
F/R
LOCK
H/L

A
A
B
B
CVDB

DRIVE
PRCB
8050ma2022

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] ADU conveyance roller /2 Paper conveyance while in the double side copy mode and
loop formation for the correction of paper skew correction
Motor drive
[2] ADU reverse roller Paper conveyance in the ADU reverse section and switching
of the conveyance path
Motor drive
Roller type
New type: Spike roller
Old type: Rubber roller

2-49 2
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Symbol Name Function or method


[3] Reverse/exit roller /2 Paper conveyance in the reverse section
Motor drive
Roller type
New type: Spike roller
Old type: Rubber roller
[4] Paper exit roller Paper conveyance in the paper exit section
Motor drive
[5] Reverse gate Switching of the paper exit path at the fixing unit exit section
II UNIT EXPLANATION

Solenoid drive
[6] Decurler roller Paper conveyance and paper curl correction in the reverse section
Motor drive
[7] Fixing section Fixing of paper that has been transferred
See "12. FIXING UNIT."
[8] ADU conveyance roller /1 Paper conveyance while in the double side copy mode
Motor drive
[9] Separation discharge plate unit Separation of the transfer belt and the paper that has been
transferred
Constant current AC + DC bias applied neutralizing method
Constant current method AC output range: 0 to 300 µA
Constant voltage method DC output range: -60 to 0 µA
[10] 2nd transfer roller /L Transfer of toner from the transfer belt onto paper
Pressure/release mechanism by means of cam
Driven idly by the transfer belt
[11] Transfer belt unit Image formation for paper transfer
See "5. Transfer belt unit."
[12] Pre-transfer guide plate Conveyance guide of paper supplied
High voltage applied to prevent toner adhesion: -500 V ± 50 V
(constant voltage)
[13] Pressure arm 2nd transfer roller /L pressure/release
Motor drive
[14] Registration roller For paper conveyance in the registration section and the cor-
rection of paper skew caused by the paper stopper
Motor drive
[15] Registration cleaning sheet Cleaning of the registration roller
PET method
[16] Loop roller For paper conveyance in the registration section and loop for-
mation while in paper skew correction
Motor drive
[17] ADU pre-registration roller For paper conveyance while in the double side copy mode
and the correction of paper skew correction caused by the
paper stopper
Motor drive
[18] Intermediate conveyance roller /3 Paper conveyance from the paper feed trays /1 to /3, the
bypass tray and LCT
Motor drive

2 2-50
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

Symbol Name Function or method


[19] Bypass tray Bypass paper feed
See "9. Bypass feed section."
[20] Intermediate conveyance roller /2 Paper conveyance from the paper feed trays /1 to /3 and LCT
Motor drive
[21] ADU lock solenoid (SD6) ADU lock
24VDC drive
HV2 High voltage unit /2 Supply of high voltage to the separation discharge plate unit
and the pre-transfer guide plate

II UNIT EXPLANATION
Pressure rise method by the inverter from 24VDC
M30 Registration roller motor Registration roller drive
Stepping motor
M31 Loop roller motor Loop roller drive
Stepping motor
M32 ADU reverse motor ADU reverse roller drive
Stepping motor
M33 Reverse/exit motor Driving of the paper exit roller, decurler roller and the reverse/
exit roller /2
Stepping motor
M34 2nd transfer pressure/release Pressure arm drive
motor Stepping motor
M41 Paper feed motor M41 Paper feed motor Driving of ADU conveyance rollers 1/
and 2/, ADU pre-registration
roller and the intermediate conveyance rollers /2 and /3
DC brush-less motor
MC1 ADU conveyance clutch /2 Transmission of driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the ADU conveyance roller /2
24VDC drive
MC2 ADU conveyance clutch /1 Transmission of driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the ADU conveyance roller /1
24VDC drive
MC3 ADU pre-registration clutch Transmission of driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the ADU pre-registration roller
24VDC drive
MC4 Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 Transmission of driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the intermediate conveyance roller /2
24VDC drive
MC5 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 Transmission of driving force from the paper feed motor
(M41) to the intermediate conveyance roller /3
24VDC drive
SD4 Reverse/exit solenoid Reverse gate drive
24VDC drive
PS12 Paper exit full sensor Paper exit tray full detection
Photo sensor + actuator
PS13 Paper exit sensor Detection of paper in the paper exit unit
Photo sensor + actuator

2-51
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Symbol Name Function or method


PS19 Reverse/exit sensor Detection of paper in the reverse section
Photo sensor + actuator
PS20 ADU conveyance sensor Detection of paper at the ADU reverse path entrance
Photo sensor + actuator
PS21 ADU paper reverse sensor Detection of paper in the ADU reverse section
Photo sensor + actuator
PS22 Registration sensor Detection of paper in the registration section
Photo sensor
II UNIT EXPLANATION

PS23 ADU pre-registration sensor Detection of paper in the ADU paper loop section
Photo sensor + actuator
PS24 2nd transfer HP sensor 2nd transfer roller home position detection
Photo sensor
PS27 Intermediate conveyance sen- Detection of paper at the intermediate conveyance roller /2
sor /1 exit
Photo sensor
PS28 Intermediate conveyance sen- Detection of paper at the intermediate conveyance roller /3
sor /2 exit
Photo sensor
PS55 Conveyance lever sensor ADU open/close detection
Photo sensor

2-52
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

11.2 Operation
11.2.1 Switching control of the paper exit/ADU conveyance path

A. Straight paper exit path


The straight paper exit path is applicable to the face-up paper exit after completion of copy in the single
side copy mode, as well as after completion of the back side copy in the double side copy mode.

[5] [6]

II UNIT EXPLANATION
[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

8050ma2023

[1] Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) [4] Paper exit roller
[2] Reverse gate [5] Paper exit sensor (PS13)
[3] Paper exit full sensor (PS12) [6] Fixing section

2-53
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

B. ADU conveyance path


The ADU conveyance path is applicable to the face-down paper exit in the single side copy mode and the
conveyance to the ADU after completion of the front side copy in the double sided copy mode.

[1]
II UNIT EXPLANATION

[5]

[2]

[3]

[4]

8050ma2024

[1] Fixing section [4] Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)


[2] Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) [5] Reverse gate
[3] Decurler roller

2-54
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

C. Straight paper exit operation (single sided 2 copies)

[1]

Paper feed motor (M41)

Registration roller motor (M30)

Fixing motor (M29) F

II UNIT EXPLANATION
Reverse/exit motor (M33) F H

R L

Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)

Fixing exit sensor (PS17)

Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)

Paper exit sensor (PS13)

V TOP

[2] [3] 8050ma2025

[1] START button (ON) [3] 1st paper exit


[2] Completion of the first sheet fixing

2-55
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

D. ADU conveyance operation (double sided 2 copies)

[1]

Paper feed motor (M41)

Registration roller motor (M30)

Fixing motor (M29) F

R
II UNIT EXPLANATION

Reverse/exit motor (M33) F H

R L

Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)

Fixing exit sensor (PS17)

Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)

Paper exit sensor (PS13)

V TOP

[2] [3] [4] 8050ma2026

[1] START button (ON) [3] Completion of the back side fixing of 1st paper
[2] Completion of the front side fixing of 1st paper [4] 1st paper exit

2-56
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

11.2.2 Reverse/exit control

A. Reverse/exit path
The reverse/exit path is applicable to the face-down paper exit after completion of copy in the single side
copy mode, as well as after completion of the back side copy in the double sided copy mode.
Double sided copy mode
Face-down

[7] [8] [9]

II UNIT EXPLANATION
2

[6]

[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]

[4]
1

8050ma2027

[1] Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) [6] Paper exit roller
[2] Decurler roller [7] Paper exit sensor (PS13)
[3] Reverse/exit sensor (PS19) [8] Reverse gate
[4] Reverse/exit roller /2 [9] Fixing section
[5] Paper exit full sensor (PS12)

2-57
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

B. Reverse/exit operation (single sided 2 copies)

[1]

Paper feed motor (M41)

Registration roller motor (M30)

Fixing motor (M29) F

R
II UNIT EXPLANATION

Reverse/exit motor (M33) F H

R L

Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)

Fixing exit sensor (PS17)

Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)

Paper exit sensor (PS13)

V TOP

[2] [3] 8050ma2028

[1] START button (ON) [3] 2nd paper exit


[2] 1st paper exit

11.2.3 ADU conveyance control

Paper that has been copied on the front side and conveyed to the reverse/exit section while in the double
side copy mode is conveyed to the ADU reverse section by the reverse/exit roller /2.

2-58
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

11.2.4 Paper reverse control

A. Paper reverse path


(1) When conveying paper
Paper conveyed from the reverse/exit roller /2 is conveyed to the ADU reverse roller according to the form
of the conveyance path.

[4] [3] [2] [1]

II UNIT EXPLANATION
8050ma2029

[1] ADU paper reverse sensor (PS21) [3] ADU conveyance roller /1
[2] ADU reverse roller [4] Reverse/exit roller /2

(2) When paper reverse


Paper conveyed to the ADU reverse section is sent back by the reverse rotation of the ADU reverse roller.
At this time, it is conveyed to the ADU conveyance roller /1, not to the reverse/exit roller /2, according to
the form of the conveyance path. As a result, the paper is flipped over out. The paper thus reversed is con-
veyed to the loop roller through the ADU conveyance rollers /1 and /2 and the ADU pre-registration roller
to be copied on the back side.

[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

8050ma2030

[1] Loop roller [5] ADU reverse roller


[2] ADU pre-registration roller [6] ADU conveyance sensor (PS20)
[3] ADU conveyance roller /2 [7] ADU conveyance roller /1
[4] ADU paper reverse sensor (PS21) [8] Reverse/exit roller /2

2-59
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

B. Paper reverse operation

[1]

Paper feed motor (M41)

Registration roller motor (M30)

ADU reverse motor (M32) F

R
II UNIT EXPLANATION

Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)

ADU paper reverse sensor (PS21)

V TOP

[2] [3] [4] [5] 8050ma2031

[1] START button (ON) [4] Start of 2nd paper conveyance


[2] Start of 1st paper conveyance [5] Start of reverse operation of 2nd paper
[3] Start of revere operation of 1st paper

11.2.5 ADU pre-registration control

The paper conveyed from the ADU switchback section is formed into a loop between the ADU conveyance
roller /2 and the ADU pre-registration roller, and a paper skew is corrected.

A. ADU pre-registration path

[2] [3] [4] [5]

[1] 8050ma2032

[1] ADU pre-registration loop [4] ADU pre-registration roller


[2] ADU conveyance roller /2 [5] Loop roller
[3] ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23)

2-60
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

B. ADU pre-registration operation

[1]

Paper feed motor (M41)

Registration roller motor (M30)

ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3)

ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1)

II UNIT EXPLANATION
Registration sensor (PS22)

ADU conveyance sensor (PS20)

ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23)

V TOP

[2] [3] 8050ma2033

[1] START button (ON) [3] 2nd paper: ADU pre-registration loop
[2] 1st paper: ADU pre-registration loop

2-61
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

11.2.6 Registration control

Paper conveyed to the loop roller is formed into a loop between the registration roller and the loop roller,
and paper skew is corrected.

A. Registration path

[6] [7] [8]


II UNIT EXPLANATION

[5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 8050ma2034

[1] Intermediate conveyance roller /2 [5] 2nd transfer roller


[2] Loop roller [6] Transfer belt unit
[3] Registration loop [7] Registration sensor (PS22)
[4] Registration roller [8] Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28)

B. Registration operation

[1]

Paper feed motor (M41)

Registration roller motor (M30)

Loop roller motor (M31)

Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28)

Registration sensor (PS22)

V TOP

[2] [3] 8050ma2035

[1] START button (ON) [3] 2nd paper: Registration loop


[2] 1st paper: Registration loop

2-62
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

11.2.7 2nd transfer control

The paper that has been conveyed from the registration roller undergoes the 2nd transfer by the pressure
of the 2nd transfer roller /L on the transfer belt.

A. 2nd transfer roller /L pressure/release mechanism

[6] [3]

II UNIT EXPLANATION
[4]

[5]

[2] [1] 8050ma2036

[1] Release [4] Cam


[2] Pressure [5] Pressure arm
[3] Transfer belt unit [6] 2nd transfer roller /L

B. 2nd transfer roller /L pressure/release operation


For timing of each operation of the 2nd transfer control, see "3. Drum unit section."

11.2.8 Paper exit full detection control

When the ON condition of the paper exit full sensor (PS12) continues for the period in which the specified
number of paper exit is completed or for the specified period of time, it is considered that the paper exit
tray is full of paper. And the paper exit is stopped and a message is displayed on the LCD on the operator
panel.

2-63 2
FIXING UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

12. FIXING UNIT


12.1 Composition

[2] L4 L3 L2 [1] TH3 TH1


II UNIT EXPLANATION

TH4

PS17 [3] FHCB ACDB

TH2

TS2

[4] CLOCK
F/R
LOCK
H/L

PS16 CVDB

M29 M54 TS1 8050ma2043e

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Fixing roller /U Toner fixing by means of pressure and heating
Heating roller method
Silicon rubber + PFA resin layers
Temperature: 210°C *1
[2] Fixing roller /L Toner fixing by means of pressure and heating
Heating roller method (driven by the fixing roller /U)
Pressure/release by means of cam drive
Silicon rubber + PFA resin layers
Temperature: 190°C *1
[3] Cleaning roller Cleaning of the fixing roller /U
[4] Cleaning web Cleaning of the cleaning roller
M29 Fixing motor Driving of the fixing roller /U
Fixing roller /L pressure/release drive
24V brushless DC motor
M54 Web motor Driving of the cleaning web, Synchronous motor
PS16 Fixing pressure release sensor Fixing roller /L pressure/release HP detection
PS17 Fixing paper exit sensor Paper exit detection from fixing

2 2-64
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING UNIT

Symbol Name Function or method


L2 Fixing upper lamp /1 Heating of the fixing roller /U (main)
Halogen heater 750W
L3 Fixing upper lamp /2 Heating of the fixing roller /U (sub)
Halogen heater 750W
L4 Fixing lower lamp Heating of the fixing roller /L
Halogen heater 550W
TH1 Fixing temperature sensor /1 Temperature detection at the center of the fixing roller /U
(main)

II UNIT EXPLANATION
Non-contact microthermistor
TH2 Fixing temperature sensor /2 Temperature detection at the center of the fixing roller /L
(main)
Non-contact microthermistor
TH3 Fixing temperature sensor /3 Temperature detection at the edge (at rear) of the fixing roller
/U (sub)
Contact thermistor
TH4 Fixing temperature sensor /4 Temperature detection at the edge (at rear) of the fixing roller
/L (sub)
Contact thermistor
TS1 Thermostat /1 Fixing roller /U temperature abnormality detection
Non-contact bimetal
Set temperature: 190°C
TS2 Thermostat /L Fixing roller /L temperature abnormality detection
Non-contact bimetal
Set temperature: 160°C
FHCB Fixing heater control board Prevention of noise leak in the drive power for the fixing upper
lamp /1, /2 (L2, L3) 220V system only

*1 Varies depending on the mode, the paper type and the environmental conditions.

2-65 2
FIXING UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

12.2 Operation
12.2.1 Fixing drive control

Paper is conveyed with the heated fixing roller /U and the heated fixing roller /L pressed together, and is
fixed with toner. The pressure of the fixing roller is released at idling.

A. Fixing drive operation


The driving force of the fixing roller (M29) [1] is transmitted through the gear to the fixing roller [2] and the
II UNIT EXPLANATION

fixing paper exit roller [3]. There is a one-way clutch [4] provided between M29 and fixing roller /U, and the
transmission of driving force when M29 rotates in the normal direction is limited only to the fixing roller /U
and the fixing paper exit roller.
The same shaft of the one-way clutch [4] is provided with another one-way clutch [5] which is a transmis-
sion to the pressure/release drive cam mechanism [6]. The one-way clutches [4] and [5] operate one way
in the opposite direction of each other.

[2]

[3]

[1]

[6] [4] [5] [4] 8050ma2044

2-66
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING UNIT

12.2.2 Pressure/release control

The pressure of the fixing roller /L onto the fixing roller /U is made by the reverse rotation of the fixing
motor (M29) and the cam mechanism.

A. Pressure/release operation
When the fixing motor (M29) [1] rotates in the reverse direction, the cam mechanism applies pressure (a
broken line in the drawing) onto the fixing roller /L [3]. There is a one-way clutch [4] provided between M29
and the cam mechanism to provide the transmission of driving force when M29 is rotating reversely, this

II UNIT EXPLANATION
force is limited only to the cam. The detection of pressure/release is made by the fixing pressure release
sensor (PS16) provided on the same shaft as the cam.

[1]

[4]

[3]

[2] 8050ma2045

B. Pressure/release control
Pressure on the fixing roller /L is released while in warm-up. When copy starts, the fixing motor (M29)
rotates reversely to apply pressure, and it stops when the fixing pressure release sensor (PS16) turns off.
The unit is now in the pressured state. M29 returns to the forward rotation to convey paper.

[2] [3]

Fixing motor (M29) Forward

Backward

Fixing pressure release sensor (PS16)

[1] 8050ma2046

[1] START button (ON) [3] Fixing paper in conveyance


[2] Pressure operation

2-67
FIXING UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

12.2.3 Web control

The web motor (M54) is driven for a specified period of time for each print to clean the fixing roller /U
through the cleaning roller.
The operation of M54 starts at the same time as the registration roller motor (M30). In order to make web
travel distance even on the cleaning roller, the ON time of M54 is determined by the accumulated M54
drive time.

12.2.4 Temperature control


II UNIT EXPLANATION

The fixing roller /U is heated by the fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) and the fixing upper lamp /2 (L3). The fixing
roller /L heated by the fixing lower lamp /2 (L4). L2 and L3 are connected in parallel and they turn on and
off at the same time.
the fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and the fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detect the temperature
of the fixing roller /U and control it by turning on and off L2 and L3 through the AC drive board (ACDB) so
that it is held at the specified temperature.
In the same way, the fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) and the fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detect
the temperature of the fixing roller /L to turn on and off L4.

A. Warm-up
The moment the sub power switch (SW2) turns on, the lighting circuits of the fixing upper lamps 1/ and /2
(L2, L3) and the fixing lower lamp /2 (L4) inside the AC drive board (ACDB) turn on. L2, L3 and L4 are kept
on until a specified temperature is obtained.
After completion of warming-up, the printer control board (PRCB) controls the L2, L3 and L4 so that the set
temperature is maintained while in idling. At this time, L2, L3, and L4 are not turned on simultaneously.
Warm-up time: 420 sec. or less in Metric/390 sec. or less in Inch (at room temperature of 20°C)

B. Protection against abnormality


Thermostats are employed to protect the fixing roller against its abnormal temperature rise. The fixing
roller /U is provided with thermostat /1 (TS1) and the fixing roller /L is provided with thermostat /2 (TS2)
respectively.
When TS1 detects an abnormal temperature, the flow of electricity to the fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) and the
fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) is shut off at the same time.
And when TS2 detects an abnormal temperature, the flow of electricity to the fixing lower lamp /2 (L4) is
shut off.

1 2-68
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 INTERFACE

13. INTERFACE
13.1 Composition

[1]
[2]

II UNIT EXPLANATION
[3]
[4]
[5]

8050ma2037

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Video interface for IP-901/IP- For IP-901/IP-921
921
[2] Serial port (RS-232C) For KRDS communications
D-SUB 9-pin connector
[3] Parallel port (based on IEEE 1284) For ISW of copier
36-pin centronics connector
[4] Serial port (USB Type B) For ISW of copier
Ver.1.1
[5] RJ45 Ethernet connector Port for network

2-69 2
IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

14. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL


14.1 Toner density control
The purpose of this control is to correct the reference value of toner density for each color against variable
factors of the image density such as environmental factors.

A. Explanation of the operation


The charging amount of toner changes depending on the environmental factors such as the temperature
II UNIT EXPLANATION

and humidity.
And in proportion to the length of time since developer was last used, toner tends to be hard to get
charged.
The reference value of toner density is varied to correct these change in the charging amount of toner.

B. Timing of the operation


• When the environmental factors such as the temperature and/or humidity change.
• For each elapsed hour of the use of developer

14.2 Dmax control


The purpose of the Dmax control is to set the highest image density for each color to the reference level.
The Dmax control is carried out by the gamma sensor (PS11), drum motors /Y, /M, /C and /K (M14, M15,
M16 and M17), transfer belt motor (M18), 1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19) and the developing
motors /Y, /M, /C and /K (M20, M21, M22 and M23), and controlled by the printer control board (PRCB).
Related sensors include the temperature/humidity sensor (TEMP/HUM).

A. Explanation of the operation


With a patch image created on the transfer belt at the maximum exposure amount, each density is read by
the gamma sensor (PS11). This operation is repeated several times while changing a developing bias
value each time. The developing bias value obtained when the density reaches the reference level is
stored as an optimum developing bias value of the machine and developing is made at this developing
bias value.

B. Timing of the operation


• When the sub power switch (SW2) is turned on for the first time in 6 hours or more after it was turned
off.
• When the job starts 6 hours or more after the SW2 has been turned on.
• Every 1,000 pages of output. However at the time of completion of the job, when the 1,000th page is
contained in the job.
• When the humidity has changed more than 30% RH from the value measured at the last operation.

1 2-70
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

14.3 Charging potential control


14.3.1 Correction of the reference value

The purpose of this control is to set the charging potential for each color to the reference level.
The charging potential control is carried out by the drum potential sensors /Y, /M, /C and /K (DRPS Y, M, C
and K), drum potential sensor boards /Y, /M, /C and /K (DRPSB Y, M, C and K), drum motors /Y, /M, /C and
/K (M14, M15, M16 and M17), and the developing motors /Y, /M, /C and /K (M20, M21, M22 and M23), and
controlled by the printer control board (PRCB). Related sensors include the temperature/humidity sensor

II UNIT EXPLANATION
(TEMP/HUM).

A. Explanation of the operation


Based on the DC bias value determined by the Dmax control, the grid voltage is corrected by using an out-
put value read from the drum potential sensor so that the value becomes a charging potential shifted by
the specified value from this DC bias value.

B. Timing of the operation


• When the sub power switch (SW2) is turned on for the first time in 6 hours or more after it was turned
off.
• When the job starts 6 hours or more after the SW2 has been turned on.
• Every 1,000 pages of output. However at the time of completion of the job, when the 1,000th page is
contained in the job.
• When the humidity has changed more than 30% RH from the value measured at the last operation.
• When the job starts where the process speed is slowed down to 1/2 or 1/3 speed. However, once
operated under this condition after the SW2 turns on, the operation is not carried out again until the
SW2 turns off.

14.3.2 Low humidity environment correction

When in a low humidity environment, the humidity is lower in the enclosed area (near the cleaning section)
along the drum circumference. This result in an uneven charging potential along the circumference of the
drum. Accordingly, this correction method is used to prevent these conditions from happening.

A. Explanation of the operation


To ease the influence on the drum caused by the ambient humidity around the drum, the drum for each
color is rotated 45° periodically while in idling.

B. Timing of the operation


• The drums are turned once every 3 minutes when the humidity gets below 30% RH.

2-71 1
IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

14.4 Dot diameter adjustment control


The dot diameter adjustment control is a method by which intermediate exposure potential is output stably,
regardless of the changes in the sensitivity of photosensitive materials or the stain of the writing system.
The laser output is controlled by the printer control board (PRCB) so that the intermediate exposure poten-
tial that is determined by the PWM128 value for each color is between a developing bias value determined
by the Dmax control and a maximum exposure potential.

A. Explanation of the operation


II UNIT EXPLANATION

The drum potential exposed with a PWM128 value is read by the drum potential sensor and the MPC
value for the laser is corrected to be within the standard value.

B. Timing of the operation


• When the sub power switch (SW2) is turned on for the first time in 6 hours or more after it was turned
off.
• When the job starts 6 hours or more after the SW2 has been turned on.
• Every 1,000 pages of output. However at the time of completion of the job, when the 1,000th page is
contained in the job.
• When the humidity has changed more than 30% RH from the value measured at the last operation.

1 2-72
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

14.5 Gamma correction control


The gamma correction control detects the gamma characteristics of the image density against the expo-
sure amount in the image creation section (drum and transfer belt) for each color, to make the relationship
between the original density and the copy density become the set one.
The gamma correction control is carried out by the gamma sensor (PS11), drum motors /Y, /M, /C and /K
(M14, M15, M16 and M17), transfer belt motor (m18), 1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19) and the
developing motors /Y, /M, /C and /K (M20, M21, M22 and M23), and controlled by the printer control board
(PRCB). Related boards and sensors include the drum potential sensor boards /Y, /M, /C and /K (DRPSB

II UNIT EXPLANATION
Y, M, C and K), drum potential sensor /Y, /M, /C and /K (DRPS Y, M, C and K) and the temperature/humid-
ity sensor (TEMP/HUM).

A. Explanation of the operation


The gradation patch is created on the transfer belt and read by the gamma sensor (PS11). The correction
value for the gamma curve is determined by the sensor output value with the predefined relationship
between the sensor output and the output image.

B. Timing of the operation


• When the sub power switch (SW2) is turned on for the first time in 6 hours or more after it was turned
off.
• When the job starts 6 hours or more after the SW2 has been turned on.
• Every 1,000 pages of output. However at the time of completion of the job, when the 1,000th page is
contained in the job.
• When the humidity has changed more than 30% RH from the value measured at the last operation.

2-73 1
OTHER CONTROLS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

15. OTHER CONTROLS


15.1 Parts to which power is supplied even when the main power
switch is turned off

CBR1 SW1

NF
II UNIT EXPLANATION

CBR2

AC(H)

AC(N)
ACDB 8050ma2038

Regardless of the on/off position of the main power switch (SW1), the following components are supplied
with power so long as the power cord is plugged into the power outlet.

A. Circuit breakers /1 and /2 (CBR 1 and 2)


When more than a specified amount of current flows due to the short-circuit of internal parts, it turns off to
shut off the current to the machine.

B. Noise filter (NF)


This reduces the level of noise that enters through the power line.

C. AC drive board (ACDB)


This supplies AC power to each unit and turns on and off the fixing heater lamps and the heaters.

1 2-74
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 OTHER CONTROLS

15.2 Parts that operate only when the power switch is turned on
15.2.1 Parts that operate when the main power switch is turned on

5VDC SW2
REMOTE
SW1 DCPS1
OACB

3.3VDC
5VDC IPB
12VDC

II UNIT EXPLANATION
5VDC
12VDC
OB1 DCPS4
24VDC (OPTION)
5VDC
PRCB Document Feeder
12VDC (OPTION)
24VDC
Finisher
(OPTION)
Large Capacity Tray
(OPTION)
5VDC
TSDB
5VDC
CVDB

ACDB DCPS2
RL2 24VDC

RL3 TRNS1 HTR1,2


TRNS2
RL1 Fixing unit

DCPS3
(OPTION) 8050ma2039e

When the main power switch (SW1) turns on, AC power is supplied to the DC power unit /1 (DCPS1), AC
drive board (ACDB) and the DC power unit /3: optional (DCPS3).
As a result, DCPS1 supplies 5VDC to the overall control board (OACB) to monitor it with the sub power
switch (SW2).
The ACDB turns ON the HTR relay (RL3) in the board and provides 24VAC to each heater via the trans-
former/main body (TRNS1) and the transformer/LCT (TRNS2).

15.2.2 Parts that operate when the sub power switch is turned on

When the sub power switch (SW2) is turned on, the overall control board (OACB) detects this condition
and sends a control signal to the DC power unit /1 (DCPS1) and the AC drive board (ACDB).
As a result, DCPS1 supplies 3.5VDC, 5VDC, 12VDC and 24VDC to all the boards and optional devices.
The ACDB turns ON the HTR relay (RL3) in the board and provides 24VAC to each heater via the trans-
former/main body (TRNS1) and the transformer/LCT (TRNS2).

2-75 2
OTHER CONTROLS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

15.3 Fan control


15.3.1 Fan composition

DRIVE DRIVE
EM EM
H/L H/L
DRIVE [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] DRIVE
EM EM
H/L
[16] H/L
DRIVE
EM [22]
H/L
SCDB
DRIVE
II UNIT EXPLANATION

EM DRIVE
EM
DRIVE
EM DRIVE
DRIVE [1] EM
EM DRIVE
H/L EM

[15] [2] H/L


DRIVE
DRIVE EM
EM [3] H/L

DRIVE [14] DRIVE


EM EM
[4]
H/L H/L

DRIVE
[13] DRIVE
EM
EM
H/L
[5] H/L

[12] DRIVE
EM
H/L
DRIVE DRIVE
EM EM
H/L
[11] [6] H/L

[7]
DRIVE
[10] EM
H/L

TSDB
DRIVE
EM PRCB-2/2
FRONT [9] [8]
PRCB-1/2 8050ma2040

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Write exhaust fan /1 (M45) Writing section cooling
[2] Write intake fan /1 (M43) Writing section cooling
[3] Write exhaust fan /2 (M46) Writing section cooling
[4] IP cooling fan (M25) Cooling of the overall control board (OACB)
[5] IPB cooling fan (M24) Cooling of the image processing board (IPB)
[6] Write intake fan /2 (M44) Writing section cooling
[7] DCPS cooling fan (M42) Cooling around DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)
[8] Paper exit fan /3 (M63) Sheet of paper exit cooling (New type only)
[9] Paper exit fan /F (M28) Cooling around the paper reverse exit section and cooling of paper
[10] Charging intake fan (M48) Adverse wind to the charging corona
[11] Paper exit fan /R (M26) Cooling around the paper reverse exit section and cooling of paper
[12] Paper exit fan /M (M27) Cooling around the paper reverse exit section and cooling of paper
[13] Paper exit fan /2 (M62) Sheet of paper exit cooling (New type only)
[14] Paper exit fan /1 (M61) Sheet of paper exit cooling (New type only)
[15] Transfer belt cooling fan (M11) Cooling around the transfer belt
[16] Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10) Cooling around the fixing section of the paper exit side
[17] Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36) Cooling around the fixing section
[18] Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37) Cooling around the fixing section

2 2-76
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 OTHER CONTROLS

Symbol Name Function or method


[19] Drum cooling fan /1 (M12) Discharging heat around the drum drive motor out of the machine
[20] Drum cooling fan /2 (M13) Discharging heat around the drum drive motor out of the machine
[21] Scanner cooling fan (M2) Cooling of the scanner section
[22] Drum unit fan (M47) Cooling around the drum

15.4 Operation board control


15.4.1 Operation board composition

II UNIT EXPLANATION
TOUCH PANEL
BOARD

LCDB

OB INVB

OB3
OB1

OB2

SW2

OACB 8050ma2041

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Touch panel board Touch switch board used to directly select items shown on the
LCD board (LCDB)
LCDB LCD board Information of all sorts is displayed on this
OB INVB OB inverter board Inverter that drives the LCD board (LCDB)
OB1 Operation board /1 Control of the touch panel board, LCD board (LCDB), OB
inverter board (OB INVB), operation board /3 (OB3), and the
control of the LED within the operation board /1 (OB2) and
the numeric pad
OB2 Operation board /2 LED-loaded board to grasp the on/off condition of the main
power switch (SW1)
OB3 Operation board /3 Volume loaded board to adjust the brightness of the LCD
board (LCDB)
SW2 Sub power switch Power switch of the operation board
It does not function when the main power switch (SW1) is off

2-77 1
OTHER CONTROLS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

15.5 Counter control


15.5.1 Counter composition

OACB OB1

C(T)

C(BK)
II UNIT EXPLANATION

C(K)
OPTION
[1]
COIN VENDOR
(SERIAL) OPTION

PS13
PRCB 8050ma2042

Symbol Name Function or method


[1] Coin vendor (serial) Copying is controlled depending on the presence of a coin.
(Optional) (Serial connection)
OB1 Operation board /1 This displays a copy count
C(T) Total counter This displays a total cumulative copy count in all copy modes
Mechanical counter driven by an electric signal
C(BK) Black counter This displays a cumulative copy count in the black-and-white
copy mode
Mechanical counter driven by an electric signal
C(K) Key counter (optional) This is a counter that makes a copy operation unavailable
when a specified number of copies has been counted
Mechanical counter driven by an electric signal
PS13 Paper exit sensor This detects paper in the paper exit section and sends a con-
trol signal to each counter
Photo sensor + actuator

15.5.2 Counter operation

This machine uses a counter on the software to count a number of copies.

A. Paper exit counter


The counter takes the count of 1 every time the paper exit sensor (PS13) turns off from on. In the double
side copy mode, however, this takes the count of 2.

B. Copy counter on OB1


This displays the number of copies that have been discharged.

C. C (T)
This counts up in conjunction with the paper exit counter.

2-78
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 OTHER CONTROLS

D. C (BK)
This counts up in conjunction with the paper exit counter.

E. C (K)
This counts up in conjunction with the paper exit counter.

F. Signals in serial connection

Connector Pin No. Signal name In/Out Description

II UNIT EXPLANATION
37 1 OP_SOUT Out Open collector output (LS07)
2 OP_DTR Out Open collector output (LS07)
3 OP_CTS In 5V Pull up
4 OP_SIN In 5V Pull up
5 OP_DSR In 5V Pull up
6 OP_RTS Out Open collector output (LS07)
7 SGND — Signal ground
8 COPV_ENB In 5V Pull up
9 24VDC — Power supplied to the vendor
10 PGND — Power ground
11 5VDC — Power supplied to the vendor

G. Signals for status indicator lights

Connector Pin No. Signal name Description Output timing Type of signal
391 1A DC24V Power source of At all times 24V, 500mA
status indicator
light
9B PGND Power ground — —
2A PAT1 Light on signal L signal outputted when print is Open collec-
available tor 5V,
3A PAT2 L signal outputted while scanner or 200mA
printer in operation
4A PAT3 L signal outputted when stopped
abnormally due to jamming, abnor-
mal code, no paper or no toner
5A PAT4 L signal outputted when a toner
supply warning is displayed

2-79
OTHER CONTROLS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

15.6 ACS control


15.6.1 Switching between the color mode and the black and white mode
If more than 5 black and white sheets are fed consecutively from RADF in which both the color sheets and
the black and white sheets are stored, the pressure on the 1st transfer rollers /Y/M/C are released and it
shifts to the black and white mode. At this time, the switch is performed during JOB, so there is a time lag
between the color copy and the black and white copy.

A. Switching sequence from the color mode to the black and white mode
1. The 2nd transfer for the previous copy sheet (color) is complete.
II UNIT EXPLANATION

2. The pressure is executed on the 1st transfer roller /K (the 1st transfer rollers /Y/M/C are in release
state).
3. Writing /K is started.
4. Terminate the operation of the drum unit /Y/M/C, the developing unit /Y/M/C, and the toner supply
unit /Y/M/C.

B. Switching sequence from the black and white mode to the color mode
1. The color print is instructed.
2. The 2nd transfer for the previous copy sheet (black and white) is complete.
3. Start the operation of the drum unit /Y/M/C, the developing unit /Y/M/C, and the supply unit /Y/M/C.
4. MPC or APC is executed for the write unit /Y/M/C.
5. The pressure is executed on the 1st transfer roller /Y/M/C/K.
6. Writing /Y is started.

15.6.2 Copy count when using ACS

• There are following two kinds of copy count when using ACS.

A. The black and white mode (the 1st transfer roller /Y/M/C is in the release state)

Black and white original

Total counter Counts as black and white

Developer counter Counts as black and white

B. The color mode (the 1st transfer roller /Y/M/C is in the pressure state)

Color original Black and white original

Total counter Counts as color Counts as black and white

Developer counter Counts as color Counts as color *1

*1 If the original is black and white, the output will be black and white; however, the developer counter
counts it as color copy and the total counter counts it as black and white copy.

2-80
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 EXTERIOR

III DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
• Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet before dis-
assembly or assembly.

1. EXTERIOR
1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Dust filter /2: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the filter cover
[2]. [1]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] 8050ma3001

3-1 1
EXTERIOR KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2. Pull out the dust filter /2 [2] from the filter cover
[1].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]

[2] 8050ma3002
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

1 3-2
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 EXTERIOR

1.2 Replacing the dust filter /1


and the ozone filter /1
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Dust filter /1: Every 100,000 copies
• Ozone filter /1: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover
[1]
/2 [2].

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] [1] 8050ma3004

2. Pull out the filter replacement duct [1].

[1] 8050ma3005

3-3
EXTERIOR KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

3. Remove the 2 dust filters /1 [2] and the ozone fil-


ter /1 [3] from the filter replacement duct [1]. [1] [3] [2]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• When reinstalling the ozone filter /1, be care-
ful not snap and fracture it.
• When reinstalling the dust filter /1, be sure to
press it against the stopper section [4] of the
filter replacement duct.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[4] 8050ma3006

1 3-4
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 EXTERIOR

1.3 Replacing the toner collec-


tion box
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Toner collection box: Every 50,000 copies (to be
replaced by the user)

B. Procedure
1. Open the toner collection door [1] and pull out
[1]
the toner collection box [2].

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] 8050ma3007

3-5
EXTERIOR KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2. Peel the label [2] off the toner collection box [1]
and plug the entrance of the toner collection box
[1].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

[3]
[2]

[2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[1] 8050ma3008

3-6
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 EXTERIOR

1.4 Angle adjustment of the


operation board
Note:
• The operation board can be set at the two
steps of 7 and 18 degrees depending on the
front cover /2 provided or not provided.
When the front cover /2 provided: 7 degrees
When the front cover /2 not provided: 18
degrees

A. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and the toner supply
[3] [4] [5] [3]
door [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] and release the fixing of
the operation board [4].
3. With the operation board raised up, remove the
front cover /2 [5] (when the angle is changed
from 7 to 18 degrees).

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Fasten the operation board [4] with 2 screws [3].
5. Close the front door [1] and the toner supply
door [2].
[2]
Note:
• When changing the angle of the operation
board from 18 to 7 degrees, install the front
cover /2 by following Step 3.
[1] 8050ma3009

3-7
EXTERIOR KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

1.5 Removing and reinstalling


the main board unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the platen cover.
2. Remove the filter cover. (See "1.1 Replacing the
deodorizing filter /1 and the dust filter /2.")
3. Loosen 2 screws [1], remove 13 screws [2], and
[8] [6] [5] [7] [6] [5] [4]
then remove the rear cover [3].

4. Remove the side cover /2. (See "1.2 Replacing


the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1.")
5. Remove the screws [5], one for each, and then [4]
remove the 2 original cover supports [6].
6. Remove 2 caps [4]. [2]
7. Remove 4 screws [7] and then remove the
[2]
scanner cover /R [8].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[2]

[3] [1] 8050ma3010

8. Remove the special screw [1].


[3] [1]
9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the
board seal plate /2 [3].

[2] 8050ma3011

3-8
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 EXTERIOR

10. Remove 5 connectors [1].


11. With the lock lever [2] brought down this side, [1] [3] [1]
release the lock and pull out the ribbon cable
[3].

[3]
[2] [1]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8050ma3012

Note:
• Move the lock lever [1] forward, then insert
[2]
the ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector
while ensuring that the conductive face of the
ribbon cable [3] is positioned on the opposite
side of the lock lever.

[1]
[3]

3-9
EXTERIOR KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

• Then with the lock lever [1] brought back to its


original position, lock the ribbon cable [2]. [2]

[1]

12. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the


[1]
board seal plate /4 [2].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[2] 8050ma3013

3-10
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 EXTERIOR

13. Remove a bracket cable clamp [1].


14. Remove 2 connectors [2]. [4] [3]
15. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the main
board unit [4].
16. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• When removing or reinstalling the main board
unit, be careful that the battery on the memory
board (MB) does not touch with the frame.

[2]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1] [3] 8050ma3014

3-11
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2. SCANNER
2.1 Screws that must not be
removed
Note:
Screws that have been paint-locked are not
allowed to be removed. So, be careful not to [1]
remove them.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[1] [1] [1] 8050ma3015

3-12
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

2.2 Removing and reinstalling


the platen glass
A. Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the origi-
[4] [2] [1] [6] [5]
nal positioning plate /R [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the origi-
nal positioning plate /L [4].
3. Remove 2 screws [5] and the remove the scan-
ner cover /M [6].
4. Remove the platen glass [7].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the platen glass with its
white reference plate [8] up.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3] [8] [7] 8050ma3016

3-13
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2.3 Removing and reinstalling


the CCD unit
A. Procedure for removal
1. Remove the platen glass. (See "2.2 Removing
and reinstalling the platen glass.")
2. Remove the connector [1].
3. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the CCD
cover [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the rib-
bon cable cover [5].

[4] [5] [3]


III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[1] [2] 8050ma3141

5. With the lock lever [1] brought down, release the


lock and pull out the ribbon cable [2].

Note:
• Move the lock lever [1] downward, then insert
the ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector
while ensuring that the conductive face of the
ribbon cable is positioned on the opposite
side of the lock lever.
• Then bring the lock lever back to its original
position, lock the ribbon cable.

[1] [2] 8050ma3142

3-14
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

6. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD


unit [2]. [1] [2]

Note:
• Be careful not to remove screws other than
those mentioned above. Otherwise, it
becomes necessary to make all sort of optical
adjustments which cannot be handled in the
field.
• Be careful not to touch the lens. This may
result in poor images.
• When replacing the CCD unit, be sure to
check the image by referring to the chapter I
"7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment" in the
Field Service. When any abnormality is found [1] 8050ma3143

with the image, be sure to make adjustments


by following the procedure.

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
steps in reverse.

Note:
[3]
• When replacing the CCD unit, be sure to
remove the 4 screws [3] from the CCD lens
unit the parts of which have been purchased,
and then install only the CCD unit to the scan-
ner side. At this time, no mounting plate [4] is
used.

[4] 8050ma3221

3-15 2
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2.4 Removing and reinstalling


the exposure unit
A. Procedure for removal
1. Remove the slit glass. (See "2.2 Removing and
reinstalling the slit glass.")
2. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing of the toner supply section.")
3. Remove 2 caps [2].
[2] [1] [2]
4. Remove 6 screws [1].
5. After removing the relay connector [4] with the
scanner cover /F [3] shifted to the front side
once, remove the scanner cover /F [3].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[3] [4]

[1]

8050ma3017

3-16
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

6. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the fixing of


the exposure unit [2]. [1] [5] [4] [2]
7. Rotate the exposure unit [2] while holding it hor-
izontally, pull it up and place it upon the scanner
room [6].

[3]
[6] [5] [1] 8050ma3018

8. Remove the connector [1].


9. Remove the screw [2] and release the cable [4] [2] [1] [3] [5]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
from the cable holder [3].
10. Remove the exposure unit [5].

[4] 8050ma3019

3-17
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

B. Procedure for reinstallation


1. Set the exposure unit [1] into the main body.
2. Move the V-mirror unit [2] to the paper exit side, [2] [4] [1]
and pass an optical positioning jig [3] through
each of the exposure unit [1] and the V-mirror
unit [2] from the front side.

Note:
• When reinstalling the exposure unit, be sure
to use the optical positioning jig.

3. Fasten the exposure unit [1] with 2 screws [4].


4. Remove 2 optical positioning jigs [3].
5. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts fol-
lowing the removal steps in reverse.
[4]
[3] 8050ma3020
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-18
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

2.5 Removing and reinstalling


the exposure lamp
A. Procedure
1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing
and reinstalling the exposure unit.")
2. Cut the binding band [1] and release the fixing
of the cable [2]. [1] [3] [6]
3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the HP
detection plate [4].
4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove L1
(exposure lamp) [6].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] [4] [5] 8050ma3021

3-19
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2.6 Removing the scanner wire


A. Procedure
1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing
and reinstalling the exposure unit.")
2. Remove 2 caps [1].
[1] [4] [3] [2] [1]
3. Remove the screw [2] and remove the scanner
cover /R [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and remove the scanner
cover /L [5].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[5] 8050ma3022

5. Loosen the screws [1], one for each, and


[2]
release the fixing of two spring fixing plates [2].

[1] 8050ma3023

3-20
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

6. Remove the wire terminal [3] of the scanner wire 8. Remove the scanner wire /R [2] from the drive
/R [2] from the spring fixing plate [1], and then pulley [10].
remove the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of 9. Remove the scanner wire /F [11] by following
the pulley /3 [4], the outside of the V-mirror pul- Steps 5 to 7.
ley [5] and the pulley /2 [6].
7. Remove the metal bead [8] of the scanner wire / Note:
R [2] from the wire stopper [7], and then remove • The scanner wires /F and /R are installed sym-
the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of the inside metrically.
of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /1 [9].

[9]

[5] [10]

[2]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] [6] [3]

[2]

[3]

[1]
[11]
[2] [7] [8] 8050ma3024

3-21
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2.7 Reinstalling the scanner wire


A. Procedure
1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] to the paper exit side,
[1]
and pass the optical positioning jig [2] through
the V-mirror unit [1] from the front side.

Note:
• Be careful not to damage the mirror with the
jig.
• When reinstalling the scanner wire, be sure to
fasten the V-mirror with the optical position-
ing jig.

[2] 8050ma3025
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

2. Drop into the fitting hole of the drive pulley [4] a


[6] [5] [1]
metal bead [3] provided at the center of each of
the scanner wires /F [1] and /R [2], and starting [4]
from this hole, wind the scanner wire 2.5 turns
[5] outwards and 3.5 turns [6] inwards.
[3] [8]
[7]
Note:
• For the scanner wires /F and /R, common
wires are used. [8]
• Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that
the wire terminal is on the outside and the [4]
metal bead [7] on the inside.
• Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that
both ends of the wire come out under the [2] [5] [6]
drive pulley.
• Be sure to wind each of the scanner wires [4]
closely around the drive pully with no wire
running on another wire. [3] [7] 8050ma3026

3. After winding the scanner wires /F and R/, be


sure to fasten each wire end with a tape [8] so
that it will not come off.

3-22
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 SCANNER

4. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the metal bead 6. Reinstall the scanner wire /F [11] by following
[3] side (inside) which is wound around the drive Steps 4 and 5.
pulley [1] through the pulley /1 [4] and the V-mir-
ror pulley [5] in this order, and then hook the
metal bead [3] onto the wire stopper [6].
5. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the wire termi-
nal [7] side (outside) which is wound around the
drive pulley [1] through the pulley /2 [8] and the
outside of V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /3
[9] in this order , and then hook the wire terminal
[7] onto the spring fixing plate [10].

[9]

[5] [10]

[2]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] [6] [3]

FRONT

[2]

[3]

[1]
[11]
[2] [7] [8] 8050ma3027

3-23
SCANNER KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

7. Tighten the screws [1], one for each, and fasten


the 2 spring fixing plates [2]. [2]
8. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts fol-
lowing the removal steps in reverse.

[1] 8050ma3140
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-24
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 WRITING

3. WRITING
3.1 Screw that must not be
removed
Note:
• The screws [1] of each unit of the YMCK are
not allowed to be removed. So, be careful not
to remove them.

[1] 8050ma3028

III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-25
WRITING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

3.2 Removing and reinstalling


the write unit

Warning:
• Be sure that the write unit should not be
powered with it slid from its normal instal-
lation position.
• Be sure not to remove the write unit cover
while being supplied with power. Otherwise,
laser beams get into your eyes and you may
lose your sight.

Note:
• Bu sure not to remove the write unit cover.
Do not loosen the screws, either.
• When removing the write unit, be careful not
to touch the dust glass (to prevent the mirror
from being stained).
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

• Be sure not to remove the write unit for at


least two minutes after the main power switch
is turned off.
• When replacing the side cover /1, insert the
prong [1] on the side cover /1 into the notch
on the main body.
[1] 8050ma3175

A. Procedure
1. Open the bypass tray [1].
2. Loosen 4 screws [2] and remove the side cover [4] [5] [2]
/2 [3].
3. Loosen 5 screws [4] and remove the side cover
/1 [5].

[3]
[1] 8050ma3029

3-26
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 WRITING

4. Remove 5 relay connectors [1].


5. Remove 10 screws [2] and then remove the fan [2] [2]
holder /R [3].

[2] [3] [1] [2] 8050ma3030

6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the write


pressing board [2] while pressing it downward. [3] [1]
7. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove 2 write
cooling ducts [4].

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
• Be sure to hold the upper half of the write
pressing board when removing it. [4]

[3] [2] 8050ma3031

8. Remove the connectors [1], 2 each, and then


[2] [1]
remove the write unit /Y [2], write unit /M [3],
write unit /C [4] and the write unit /K [5]. [1]
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[3]
steps in reverse.

[4]

[5] [1]
[1] 8050ma3032

3-27
WRITING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Note:
• The write units /C, /M and /Y are all common.
• The bottom of the write units /C, /M and /Y is
provided with a wire tension spring [1] which
differentiates these three write units from the
write unit /K.
• Be careful not install any other write unit in
the installation place for the write unit /K.

[1] 8050ma3034
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-28
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

4. PROCESS UNIT
4.1 Flow of the disassembly of
the process unit section

Open the toner supply section

Open the front fan cover

Pull out the process unit Remove the charging corona unit

Pull out the transfer belt unit

Remove the drum cartridge Remove the developing unit

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Remove the process unit

Remove the image correction unit

3-29
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.2 Cleaning the charging


corona unit
A. Procedure

Note:
• The charging corona units are provided for
the four colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and
black. These units are common. Do not reuse
a charging corona unit that was once used for
a color since it has been stuck with the toner
of the color.

1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-


ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. With the lever [2] of the charging corona unit [1]
pressed down once to the lower right side, pull
out the charging corona unit this side for
removal.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[1]

[2]

8050ma3037

3-30
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

3. Remove a charging cleaning block [3] from the


charging suction assembly [2] provided on the [3] [1]
outside of the toner supply unit [1].

Note:
• There are two charging cleaning blocks pro-
vided. Be sure to use either of these two
blocks when cleaning the charging corona.

[2] 8050ma3038

4. Holding the charging corona unit [2] so that the


charging control plate [1] comes up, set the

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
charging cleaning block [3] to the notch and
insert it from under the bottom on the rear side,
and turn it about 45° clockwise.

[2]
Note:
• If the charging wire is cleaned with the charg-
ing control plate facing down, there is a risk
that dust that has stuck to the charging wire
sticks to the charging control plate. So, when
cleaning the charging wire, be sure to hold
the charging corona unit so that the charging
control plate comes upward.

5. Clean the charging wire [4] by sliding back and


forth the charging cleaning block [3].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[3] 8050ma3039

3-31
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.3 Cleaning/replacing, remov-


ing and reinstalling
the charging wire assy
/the charging control plate
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Charging wire assy: Every 100,000 copies
• Charging control plate: Every 200,000 copies
• Charging grid spring: Every 200,000 copies
Note:
• The charging corona unit is made up of a
charging wire assy, charging control plate
and a charging grid spring.

B. Procedure
1. Remove the charging corona unit. (See "4.2
Cleaning and replacing the charging corona
unit.")
2. Remove 2 charging control springs [1] and then
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

remove the charging control plate [2].


3. Clean the charging control plate by blowing off
dust with a blower brush.
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• Be sure to install the charging control plate so
that the side on which the charging control [2]
spring is hooked comes to the front of the
charging corona unit.
• Be sure to install each of the charging control
springs with its tips [3] of both ends point
toward the charging wire.

[1] [2]

[3] 8050ma3040

3-32
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

4.4 Pulling out the process unit


Note:
• In order to prevent the main body from falling
down, the process unit and the ADU are pro-
vided with a safety mechanism so that they
cannot be pulled out at the same time.
• If the ADU has been pulled out when pulling
out the process unit, be sure to push it back
into the main body.
• When the process unit cannot be pulled out,
be sure to check the lock levers /1 and /2 to
see if they are deformed and replace them if
necessary. (See "11.13 Replacing the lock
levers /1 and /2.")

A. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. Loosen the screw [1] and open the front fan
[2]
cover [2].

[1] 8050ma3035

3-33 2
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

3. Bring down the stand handle /L [1] and the


stand handle /R [2] to the inside at the same [3]
time to release the fixing of the process unit [3].
Then, hold each of the stand handles to pull out
the process unit [3].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

[2]
[1] 8050ma3036
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-34
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

4.5 Removing and reinstalling


the transfer belt unit
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out
the process unit.")
2. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each.
3. After turning once the belt positioning shaft [2] [2]
counterclockwise, pull it out for removal.

[1]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1] 8050ma3043

4. Remove the supporting rod [3] from the charg-


[3] [1]
ing corona suction assembly [2] provided on the
inside of the toner supply unit [1].

Note:
• The supporting rod is an auxiliary device to
allow a removed transfer belt unit to self
stand. When removing the transfer belt unit,
be sure to make necessary arrangements in
advance.

[2] 8050ma3044

3-35
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

5. With the handle [1] raised up, remove the trans-


fer belt unit [2]. [1] [2]

Note:
• Be careful not to touch and damage the trans-
fer belt [3] with bare hands.
• Make sure to grab both ends of the handle of
the transfer belt with both hands.

[3] 8050ma3045

6. Set the supporting rod [2] to the transfer belt unit


[1] to allow it to self stand.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

Note:
• Make sure not to touch and damage the trans-
fer belt unit with the drum at installation.

[2] [1] 8050ma3046

3-36
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

Note:
• When reinstalling the transfer belt unit [1], be
[1]
sure to turn the cam [3] clockwise fully until it
will not turn any more before starting work.
• Be sure to install the transfer belt unit so that
2 transfer support blocks /F [4] and the 2
transfer support blocks /R [5] are accompa-
nied with the guide pins [2] provided at two
[2]
places each at front and rear. [2]
• Be sure not to rotate the transfer belt when
the transfer belt unit self stand with a support-
ing rod.
[3]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[5] [4] 8050ma3047

3-37
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.6 Replacing the belt cleaning


roller unit
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Belt cleaning roller unit: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove the separation claw unit. (See "4.9
Replacing the belt separation claw.")
3. Remove 2 screws [2] while holding the belt
cleaning unit [1] by hand, and then remove the [2] [2]
belt cleaning unit.
4. Replace the belt cleaning roller unit with a new one.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

• When removing the belt cleaning unit, be sure to


[1]
handle it with care. Toner stored between the toner
guide roller section of the belt cleaning unit and the
belt cleaning belt section may spill out. This stored
toner grinds the surface of the belt. Therefore, the
condition in which the toner has been stored like
this is normal. And be sure to remove the separa-
tion claw unit in advance to prevent the separation [3]
claw from being stained with the split toner.
• The belt cleaning unit is made up of the belt
8050ma3048
cleaning roller unit and the parts listed below.
(For details of these parts, see "4.7 Replacing
the belt cleaning blade" and "4.8 Replacing
the toner collection sheet /1.")
Belt cleaning blade : 1 piece
Blade spring : 2 pieces
Stop ring : 2 pieces
Blade support shaft : 1 piece
Toner collection sheet /1 : 1 piece
Toner collection sheet /2 : 1 piece
Screw : 3 pieces
• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, apply
the setting powder on the portion [3] on the
transfer belt.
• When reinstalling it, set the guide sections
provided on both sides below the belt clean-
ing unit to the pins of the transfer belt unit,
and then attach the screws.

2 3-38
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

4.7 Replacing the belt cleaning


blade
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Belt cleaning blade: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the belt cleaning roller unit. (See "4.6
Replacing the belt cleaning roller unit.")
2. Remove 2 blade springs [1].
[4] [3]
3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the
blade support shaft [3] and remove the belt
cleaning blade [4].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, apply
the setting powder on the transfer belt. As for

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
where to apply the setting powder, see "4.6
[3]
Replacing the belt cleaning brush unit," 2nd [1]
item in "Note."
• Keep your hands off the blade section of the
belt cleaning blade [4]. And also be careful
not to damage the blade by hitting it against [2]
other parts.
8050ma3049

3-39 1
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.8 Replacing the toner collec-


tion sheet /1
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Toner collection sheet /1: Every 200,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the belt cleaning roller unit. (See "4.6
Replacing the belt cleaning roller unit.")
2. After removing 3 screws [1], remove the toner
collection sheet /2 [2] and then remove the toner
collection sheet /1 [3].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• Be careful not to fold the PET sheet of the
toner collection sheet /1, or damage it by hit-
ting it on the edge.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[1]

[2] [3] 8050ma3159

3-40
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

4.9 Replacing the belt separa-


tion claw
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Belt separation claw: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the sep-
[3]
aration claw unit [2].

Note:
• Be careful not to touch and/or damage the
transfer belt [3] with bare hands. [4]
• When reinstalling the separation claw unit, be
sure to apply setting powder to the semicircle
[4] of the transfer belt [3].

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]

[2]
[1]
8050ma3050

3. Remove the screws [1], one each, and then


remove 3 transfer belt separation claws [2].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

[1]

[2]

8050ma3051

3-41
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.10 Replacing the transfer belt


A. Screw that must not be removed
Note:
• The screws [1] shown in the drawing below
are not allowed to be removed. Be careful not
to remove them.

[1] 8050ma3148

B. Periodically replaced parts/cycle


III DIS./ASSEMBLY

• Transfer belt: Every 200,000 copies

C. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove the belt cleaning roller unit. (See "4.6
Replacing the belt cleaning roller unit.")
3. Remove the separation claw unit. (See "4.9
Replacing the belt separation claw.")
4. Remove 2 tension springs [1].
[1] [1]

8050ma3053

3-42
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

5. Stand up the transfer belt unit [1] by using the


front side of the transfer belt unit [1] as the bot- [2] [3] [6]
tom.
6. Remove the screw [2] and release the fixing of
the handle [3].
[7]
7. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the shaft
stopper [5].
8. Remove the screw [6] and then remove the ten- [4] [5]
sion plate /R [7].
9. Remove 2 screws [8] and then remove the high
voltage supply curler /R [9].
10. Remove the stop ring [10] and then remove the
bearing [11].
11. Pull up the transfer belt [12] for removal.
12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[12] [1]

[11] [8]

[10] [9] 8050ma3054

3-43
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Note:
• When reinstalling the tension plate /R, be sure
to hit the projection of the tension plate /R
agaist the shaft stopper as shown in the draw-
ing right.
Also, when tightening the fixing screws, be
careful of the black sheet so that it does not 8050ma3152

get caught in.


• When reinstalling the stop ring, be sure to
raise the shaft so that the stop ring is set in
the groove of the shaft.
• Be sure to reinstall the transfer belt so that
the rear side stamped with "UP SIDE" at the
edge of the belt comes up.
• When holding the transfer belt by hand, hold
it within 10mm from the both end. Be careful
not touch any part other than this.
• Be careful not to touch and/or damage the
transfer belt with bare hands.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, apply


the setting powder on the transfer belt. As for
where to apply the setting powder, see "4.6
Replacing the belt cleaning brush unit," 2nd
item in "Note."

1 3-44
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

4.11 Replacing the 1st transfer


roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K: Every 200,000
copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing
the transfer belt.") [5] [7]
2. Place the transfer belt unit as shown in the illus-
tration.
3. Remove the stop ring [1].
4. After removing 1 bearing [2], slide the stopper /4
[3] to open the tip end of the transfer release
arm [4].
5. Remove the 1st transfer roller /K [6] while sliding [7]
it. [7]
6. Remove 3 1st transfer rollers/Y, /M, /C [5].

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] [3] [3] [4]
Note: [7] [6]
• Be careful not to touch the roller section of
the 1st transfer roller with your hands. When
holding the 1st transfer roller with your
hands, be sure to hold the metal shaft section
of it.
• Be sure to reinstall the 1st transfer roller so
that a shallow groove near the groove of the
E-ring comes this side. [1] [2] 8050ma3055

• When reinstalling the 1st transfer roller, be


sure to check that there is no rise in the wir-
ing. Also, there should be no gathering of
wrinkles in the vinyl coating. If there is any
rise found in the wiring, press the wiring
toward the plate side for correction. Also, if
there is any gathering of wrinkles in the vinyl
coating, move the vinyl coating to the center
of the wiring.

7. Remove the E-rings [7], 2 each, from each of


the 1st transfer rollers.
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

3-45 1
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.12 Replacing the 2nd transfer


roller /U
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• 2nd transfer roller /U: Every 200,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing
the transfer belt.")
2. After raising the 2nd transfer roller /U [1] once,
remove it diagonally from the lower side. [2]

Note:
• The fixing of the 2nd transfer roller /U was
released when the transfer belt was removed
at the time of the removal of the high voltage
supply curler.
• Be careful not to touch the roller section of
the 2nd transfer roller /U with your hand. [1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

When holding the 2nd transfer roller /U with


your hands, be sure to hold the metal shaft
section of it.
1
• Be sure to reinstall the 2nd transfer roller /U
so that the shaft end with a dent comes to the
bottom.
2

3. Remove 2 bearings [2] from the 2nd transfer


roller /U [1].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal [2] [1] 8050ma3056

steps in reverse.

1 3-46
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

4.13 Replacing the drum cartridge


A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Drum cartridge: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure

Note:
• The drum cartridges are provided for the four
colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black,
and they are all common. However, be sure to
avoid reusing a drum cartridge that was once
used for a color since it has been stuck with
the toner of that color.

1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-


ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. After raising once both ends [2] of the drum stay
[2]
/U [1], hold them and remove the drum cartridge

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
/Y [3]. [8]
3. Remove the drum cartridge /M [4], drum car-
[7]
tridge /C [5] and the drum cartridge /K [6] in the [3]
same manner as in Step 2.
[4]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[1]
steps in reverse.
[5]
Note:
• When reinstalling each drum cartridge, be [6]
sure to check if both ends of the cartridge
have been dropped into the grooves of the
[9] 8050ma3057
drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8]. (The
drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8] are
for yellow drum cartridges. Repeat the steps
for other cartridges in the same manner.)
• When reinstalling the drum cartridge /K [6], be
careful that the mylar [9] is not caught up.
• Be careful not touch and damage the photo-
sensitive material of the drum with bare
hands.
• When the drum cartridge is not used for a
long period of time, be sure to store it in the
dark place with a cover on it (to shield the
light).

3-47
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.14 Removing and reinstalling


the drum
A. Screw that must not be removed

Note:
• Screws that are paint locked are not allowed
to be removed. Be careful not to remove them
at all costs.

[1]
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

8050ma3058

B. Procedure
1. Remove the drum cartridge. (See "4.13 Replac-
ing the drum cartridge.")
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the drum
[1]
stay /U [2].

[2] 8050ma3059

3-48
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

3. Remove the coupling shaft /A [1] and then


remove the coupling /A [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3].
5. Remove the position adjusting plate /R [8]. [6]
6. Remove the stop ring [4] and then remove the
screw idler gear [5].
7. Remove 3 screws [6] (be careful not to remove
black screw.).
8. Remove the position adjusting plate /F [7].
9. Hold both ends of the drum [9] and raise it up for
[9] [7] [5] [4]
removal.

Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the drum so that the cou-
pling side of the drum flange comes to the
rear side of the drum cartridge.

10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3]

[2] [1] [8] 8050ma3060

3-49
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.15 Replacing the developing


unit
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Developing unit: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure

Note:
• Be careful not to fold the Teflon sheet posted
at the developing sleeve side of the develop-
ing unit upper cover.
• When cleaning the developing unit, be sure to
use Hydro-Wipe which is specified as a CE
tool. Using paper or cloth other than Hydro-
Wipe will cause the developing regulation
plate in the developing unit to be stuck with
dust and lint of the paper or cloth, thus result-
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

ing in white streaks on the images.


• The developing units are provided for the four
colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black,
and they are all common. However, be sure to
avoid reusing a developing unit that was once
used for a color since it has been stuck with
the toner of that color.

1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open- [2]


ing and closing the toner supply section.") [3]
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove 4 devel-
oping support legs [3] provided inside the toner
supply unit [2].

Note:
• When placing the developing unit by itself, be
sure to set the developing support legs to the
body of the developing unit as a seat to pre- [3]
[1]
vent the toner bristles section from getting in
touch with other sections.

3. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out


the process unit.")

8050ma3062

3-50
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

4. Remove the screws [1], 3 each, and then


remove 2 developing pressing blocks [2] while [1] [1]
sliding the upper side of the developing pressing
blocks.

[2] 8050ma3063

5. Remove the relay connectors [1], 1 each, and


then remove 4 developing units [2] one at a

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
time.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse. Place an appropriate color
label supplied with the developing unit on the
new unit.

Note:
• Be careful not to open the developing unit
cover.

[1] [2] 8050ma3064

3-51
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.16 Replacing the developer


A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Developer: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit. (See "4.15 Replac-
ing the developing unit.")
2. Put the developing unit [1] on end and rotate its
upper end in drawing an arc to discharge devel-
oper. After discharging the developer, repeat
Steps 3 and 4 below to discharge all of the
developer.

8050ma3149
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3. Install the rotating jig [1] provided inside the


toner supply unit to the coupling [2] on the agita- [1] [2]
tor screw side and turn it in the arrow-marked
direction.

8050ma3150

3-52
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

4. Install the rotating jig to the coupling [1] on the


developing sleeve side and turn it in the arrow- [1]
marked direction.

Note:
• If the jig is turned in the reverse direction, it
sometimes occurs that the developer is not
discharged completely. Be careful not to turn
it in the reverse direction.

5. Charge a new developer. (See "7. 36 mode," "I.


Adjustment" in Field Service.)

8050ma3151

III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-53
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.17 Replacing the belt separa-


tion claw solenoid
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Belt separation claw solenoid: Every 1,500,000
copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove the relay connector [1].
3. Remove the screw [2] and release the cable [4]
from the cable clamp [3].
4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the SD1
(belt separation claw solenoid) [6].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

• When having reinstalled the solenoid bar,


check to see if the shaft of SD1 (belt separa-
tion claw solenoid) moves smoothly while [6]
sliding it.

[5]

[2] [3] [4] [1] 8050ma3069

2 3-54
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PROCESS UNIT

4.18 Removing and reinstalling


the process unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove all of the drum cartridges. (See "4.13
Replacing the drum cartridge.")
3. Remove all of the developing units. (See "4.15
Replacing the developing unit.")
4. Remove the screws [1], 2 each.

Note:
• When removing the process unit, be sure to
remove in advance the transfer belt unit, drum
cartridge and the developing unit. [8]
[6]
• Be careful not to remove black screws.

5. Push back the process unit [6] until it becomes [4]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
possible to see the screw [5] through each hole
[2]
[4] of the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3].
[1]
6. Remove the screws [5], 1 each. [5]

Note:
• Be careful not to remove black screws.

7. Pull out the process unit [6] again. Then remove


[6] [7]
it from the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3] as
explained below:
The projection [7] on the guide rail /L is set into
the notch [8] of the process unit. The notch [10]
of the process unit is placed on the projection [9]
on the guide rail /R. Accordingly, slide the guide
rail /L a little against the process unit to remove
it from the guide rail /L, and then remove it from [4]
the guide rail /R by raising the process unit.
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal [1] [5] [3]
steps in reverse.

[10] [9]

8050ma3070

3-55
PROCESS UNIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4.19 Removing and reinstalling


the image correction unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the process unit. (See "4.18 Removing
and reinstalling the process unit.")
2. Remove a relay connector [1].
3. Remove 2 screws and then remove the image
correction unit [3].
[4]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
Note:
• When removing the image correction unit, be
sure to remove in advance the process unit.
• When removing the image correction unit, be
careful not to touch the drum drive shaft [4] of [3] [1] [4] 8050ma3071

each color. Otherwise, this may cause stress


to it.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-56
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TONER SUPPLY

5. TONER SUPPLY
5.1 Opening and closing the
toner supply section
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Loosen the screw [2] and open the toner supply
section [3].

Note:
• With the toner supply section left open, be
sure not to apply force to the toner supply
sections such as the operation board. If
applied, the hinge of the toner supply section
may be deformed.
• When closing the toner supply section,
tighten the screw with a hand before using a
driver to prevent stripping the thread. [1] [2] [3] 8050ma3072

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Remove once the door lock [2] provided on the
inside of the toner supply section [1] and replace
it at a new position where it becomes a stopper.
4. Close the front door following the steps for
opening in reverse order.

Note:
• When the toner supply section is opened, be
sure to replace the door lock to a new position
where it becomes a stopper and prevent it
from getting in touch with the process unit
when being pulled out. [2] [1]

[2] [1] 8050ma3073

3-57
TONER SUPPLY KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

5.2 Replacing the charging dust


filter
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Charging dust filter: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Remove the charging dust filter [3] from the
charging suction assembly [2] provided on the [3] [1]
inside of the toner supply section [1].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[2] 8050ma3074

3-58
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TONER COLLECTION

6. TONER COLLECTION
6.1 Cleaning of the belt collec-
tion pipe/vertical/horizontal/
conveyance pipe
A. Procedure

Note:
• Be sure to conduct this cleaning when there
occurs an error code F13-01 (paper feed
motor abnormality) or F23-09 (transfer belt
motor abnormality).

1. Remove the process unit. (See "4.18. Removing


and reinstalling the process unit.")
2. While releasing the lock [1], pull down the ADU
release lever [2] counterclockwise.
3. While releasing the lock [3], hold the ADU

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
release lever and pull out the ADU [4].

Note:
• When the process unit has been removed, the
ADU can be pulled out only when the lock [3]
is released. This is a measure to prevent the
main body from falling down.

[2] [1] [4]

[3] 8050ma3191

3-59 2
TONER COLLECTION KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4. To prevent waste toner from dropping, put paper


[2] immediately below the horizontal convey-
ance pipe /1 [1].

[2] [1] 8050ma3192


III DIS./ASSEMBLY

2 3-60
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TONER COLLECTION

5. Remove the 7 screws [1] and loosen the screw


[2]. [1]

[1]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[1] [2] 8050ma3193

3-61 2
TONER COLLECTION KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

6. Hold the belt waste toner pouring opening [1]


and the drum /K waste toner pouring opening [2] [1]
with both hands, and remove the belt collection
pipe [3], the vertical conveyance pipes /1 [4], /2
[5], /3 [6] and /4 [7] with all these pipes left con-
nected.

Note:
• When removing the belt collection pipe and
the vertical conveyance pipes, be sure to tilt
the belt waste toner pouring opening a little to
this side.
• When reinstalling them, be sure to set the pro-
jection at the back of each pouring opening [3]
section to the main body.

[4]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[5]

[6]

[7]

[2] 8050ma3194

2 3-62
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TONER COLLECTION

7. Remove the toner collection pipe [2] from the


vertical conveyance pipe /1 [1] and pull out the [3] [2]
toner swing plate [3].

[1]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8050ma3195

3-63 2
TONER COLLECTION KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Note:
• When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the drive [2]
hole [4] of the toner swing plate [3] into the
pin [2] of the toner collection pipe [1], and
then rotate the gear [5] to check to see if the
toner swing plate moves up and down.

[4] [3] [1] [1]


III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[5] 8050ma3196

2 3-64
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TONER COLLECTION

8. Remove the toner collection pipe /2 [2] from the


toner collection pipe /1 [1]. [2] [5] [1]
9. Remove the E-ring [3] and then remove the gear
[4].
10. Pull out the toner collection screw [5] from the
toner collection pipe /1.
11. Clear the inside of the toner collection pipes /1
and /2 of waste toner.

Note:
• When cleaning the toner collection pipe /2, be
careful that the sponges [6] and [7] do not get
lost.

[6] [7]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] [3] 8050ma3197

3-65 2
TONER COLLECTION KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

12. After separating the vertical conveyance pipes /


1 [1], /2 [2], /3 [3] and /4 [4], remove each pour- [4] [6] [3] [6] [2] [6] [1]
ing opening and clear the inside of each vertical
conveyance pipe of waste toner.

Note:
• When cleaning each vertical conveyance pipe,
be careful that the 4 sponges [6] do not get
lost.
• When reinstalling each pouring opening cap,
be sure to set the concave section [7] to the
convex section [8] of the vertical conveyance
pipe.
[6] [8] [7]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[5] 8050ma3198

2 3-66
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TONER COLLECTION

13. Remove the toner collection box. (See "1.3


Replacing the toner collection box.")
14. Remove the rear cover. (See "1.5. Removing
and reinstalling the main board unit.")
15. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the fly-
wheel /C [2].
16. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the fly-
wheel /K [4].

[1] [2]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] [3] 8050ma3199

17. Place the paper [3] beneath the connecting sec-


tion of the horizontal conveyance pipe /1 [1] and
the horizontal conveyance pipe assembly [2].

Note:
• When removing the horizontal conveyance
pipe /2 from the pipe /1, waste toner may spill
out. Be sure to place paper to prevent waste
toner from dropping into the inside of the
device.

[1]
[2] [3] 8050ma3200

3-67 2
TONER COLLECTION KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

18. Remove the 2 screws [1] and pull out the hori-
zontal conveyance pipe assembly [3] from the [1]
horizontal conveyance pipe /1 [2].

[3]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[3] [2] 8050ma3201

2 3-68
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TONER COLLECTION

19. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear
[2]. [2] [1]

Note:
• When reinstalling the gear, be sure to set the
D cut [4] of the screw [3] to the D cut [5] of the
gear.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4][5] [3] 8050ma3202

3-69 2
TONER COLLECTION KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

20. Remove the bearing [1].


[3]
Note:
• When installing the bearing, be sure to set it
to the detent section [3] of the horizontal con-
veyance pipe assembly [2].

[2] [1] 8050ma3203

21. Pull out the screw [2] from the horizontal con-
veyance pipe assembly [1]. [2] [1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

Note:
• The spacer [3] is provided on the gear
attached side of the screw. When reinstalling
it, be sure to insert the spacer without fail.

[2] [3] 8050ma3204

2 3-70
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 TONER COLLECTION

22. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the


horizontal conveyance pipe /4 [2]. [1]
23. Remove the 2 screws [3] and then remove the
horizontal conveyance pipe /3 [4].
24. Clean waste toner adhering to the inside of the
horizontal conveyance pipes /2 [5], /3 [4] and /4
[2].

[2] [2] [4] [5]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] [5]

[3] 8050ma3205

3-71 2
TONER COLLECTION KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

25. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the hor-
izontal conveyance pipe /1 [2].
26. Clear the inside of the horizontal conveyance
pipe /1 of waste toner.

[1] [2] 8050ma3206

27. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

2 3-72
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3

7. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3


7.1 Removing and reinstalling
the paper feed unit
A. Procedure

Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.

1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1 [1].


2. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the
paper feed unit cover [3]. [3]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]

[1]
[2]

8050ma3160

3-73
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

3. Remove the connector [1].


4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down
shaft screw [3].
5. After sliding the paper feed unit [4] to the rear [3]
side, lift it up. Remove the connector [5] and
then remove the paper feed unit [4].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[5]
steps in reverse.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[4]

[2]

[1]

8050ma3161

3-74
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3

7.2 Removing and reinstalling


the paper feed trays /1 to /3
A. Procedure

Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.

1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.


2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove 4 screws [1] and lift up the paper feed
[1]
tray /1 [2] for removal.
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1] [2]

8050ma3162

3-75
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

7.3 Replacing the paper feed


roller and the feed rubber
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed roller: Every 2,500,000 copies (Every
800,000 copies in actual replacement count)
• Feed rubber: Every 400,000 copies (Every
125,000 copies in actual replacement count)

B. Procedure

Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.

1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.


2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove 2 stop rings [1], slide 2 bearings [2] to
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

the outside and then remove the paper feed [1]


roller assembly [3].

[2] [3] 8050ma3163

3-76
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3

4. Remove a bearing [1].


5. Remove a stop ring [2] and then remove the [7]
paper feed roller [3].
6. Remove a stop ring [4] and then remove the
feed roller [5].
7. Remove the feed rubber [6] from the feed roller
[5].
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse. [6]

Note: [5]
• Be sure to install the feed rubber [6] so that
[4]
the paint mark [7] turns in the arrow-marked
direction. [1]
• Be sure to check that each roller is not stuck
with grease.

[3] [2] 8050ma3164

III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-77
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

7.4 Replacing the double feed


prevention rubber
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Double feed prevention rubber: Every 400,000
copies (Every 125,000 copies in actual replace-
ment count)

B. Procedure

Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.

1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.


2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove the paper feed roller assembly.
4. Remove a stop ring [1] and then remove the
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

double feed prevention roller [2]. [5]


5. Remove the gear [3] from the double feed pre-
vention roller [2].
6. Remove the double feed prevention rubber [4]
from the double feed prevention roller [2].
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

[1]
Note:
• Be sure to install the double feed prevention
rubber [4] so that the paint mark [5] turns in
the arrow-marked direction.
• Be sure to check that the double feed preven-
tion roller is not stuck with grease.

[3] [4] [2] 8050ma3165

3-78
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3

7.5 Replacing the paper feed


clutch and the pre-registra-
tion clutch
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed clutches /1 to /3 (MC7, MC9, MC11):
Every 4,000,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies
in actual replacement count)
• Pre-registration clutches /1 to /3 (MC8, MC10,
MC13): Every 4,000,000 copies (Every
2,000,000 copies in actual replacement count)

B. Procedure

Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove 2 connectors [1].
4. Remove a stop ring [2] and then remove the [6]
MC7 [3].
5. Remove a stop ring [4] and then remove the
MC8 [5]. [3]
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
Note:
• When reinstalling the clutches, be sure to
check that the stopper [6] of each clutch is in [1]
the specified position.

[5] [4] 8050ma3166

3-79
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

7.6 Removing and reinstalling


the tray up/down wire
Wire length:
• Up/down wire /A and up/down wire /C: 531 mm
• Up/down wire /B and up/down wire /D: 160 mm

A. Removing the wire

Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.

1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.


2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove the paper feed tray /1.
4. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the wire
cover /FR [2]. [7] [5] [6] [2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the wire


cover /FL [4].
6. Remove 3 screws [5] and then remove the wire
cover /RR [6].
7. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the wire
cover /RL [8].

[1]

[3]

[8] [4] 8050ma3167

3-80
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3

8. Remove an E-ring [1]. 14. Remove an E-ring [13].


9. Slide the drive pulley [2] to the inside and 15. Slide the drive pulley [14] to the inside and
remove the wires /C [3] and /D [4]. remove the wires /A [15] and /B [16].
10. After removing an E-ring [5], remove the pulley 16. After removing an E-ring [17], remove the pulley
[6] and release the wires /C [3] and /D [4] from [18] and release the wires /A [15] and /B [16]
the wire restraining cover [7]. from the wire restraining cover [19].
11. Remove a screw [8] from the bottom of the 17. Remove a screw [20] from the bottom of the
paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /D paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /B
[4]. [16].
12. After removing an E-ring [9], remove the pulley 18. After removing an E-ring [21], remove the pulley
[10] and release the wire /C [3] from the wire [22] and release the wire /A [15] from the wire
restraining cover [11]. restraining cover [23].
13. Remove a screw [12] from the bottom of the 19. Remove a screw [24] from the bottom of the
paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /C paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /A
[3]. [15].

[7]
[9] [11]
[6]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3]
[10]
[5]

[3] [8]
[4]

[1]

[12] [2]

[23] [22] [19] [18]

[17]
[15]
[20]

[21] [16]

[15] [24] [14] [13] 8050ma3168

3-81
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

B. Attaching the wire 4. After winding the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10]
around the pulley [11], insert it into the shaft [13]
Note: together with the wire restraining cover [12] and
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays fasten it with an E-ring [14].
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1. Note:
• Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley
1. Install the wire /C [3] to the wire holding shaft [2] [11] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the out-
with a screw [1] from the bottom side of the side and the wire /D [10] to the inside.
paper feed tray.
2. After winding the wire /C [3] around the pulley 5. After sliding the drive pulley [15] to the outside
[4], insert it into the shaft [6] together with the with the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10] inserted
wire restraining cover [5] and fasten it with an E- into the up/down drive shaft [14], fasten it with
ring [7]. an E-ring [16].
3. Install the wire /D [10] to the wire holding shaft
[9] with a screw [8] from the bottom side of the
paper feed tray.

[12]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[7] [5] [11]


[4] [3]
[4]
[13]

[6] [3] [8]


[10]
[9]
[16]

[2] [1] [14] [15]

[17]

[18]

[17] 8050ma3169

3-82
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3

Note:
• Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley
[14] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the out-
side and the wire /D [10] to the inside.

6. Install the wires /A [17] and /B [18] by following


Steps 1 to 5.

Note:
• After completion of attaching the wires, be
sure to rotate the up/down drive shaft by hand
to check to see if the up/down plate goes up
and down smoothly.

7. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts fol-


lowing the removal steps in reverse.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-83
BYPASS TRAY KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

8. BYPASS TRAY
8.1 Replacing the paper feed
roller and the feed roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed roller: Every 800,000 copies in actual
replacement count
• Feed roller: Every 125,000 copies in actual
replacement count

B. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU. (See "11.1. Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the
paper feed solenoid cover [2]. [1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[2] [1] 8050ma3075

3. Remove the stop ring [1].


4. Remove the bearing [2] and then remove the [2] [1]
paper feed roller unit [3].

[3] 8050ma3076

3-84
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 BYPASS TRAY

5. After removing the stop ring [1], pull out the feed
shaft [2] and remove the paper feed gear [2] [3]
assembly [3].
6. Remove the paper feed roller [4] from the paper
feed gear assembly [3].

[4] [1] 8050ma3077

7. Remove the feed roller assembly [2] from the


[4]
bypass drive shaft [1].
8. Remove the feed roller [3] from the feed roller
assembly [2].

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
• Be sure to install the feed roller [3] so that the
paint mark [4] turns in the direction shown in
the drawling.

9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

[3] [2] [1] 8050ma3078

Note:
• Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1]
[4] [3] [2]
so that the actuator section [2] coincides with
the detection section of the PS47 (no paper
sensor /BP) [3].
• Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1]
so that the tip end of the paper feed side of
the paper up/down lever comes into contact
with the inside of the top plate of the paper
feed roller unit [1].

[1] 8050ma3079

3-85
BYPASS TRAY KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

8.2 Replacing the double feed


prevention roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Double feed prevention roller: Every 125,000
copies in actual replacement count

B. Procedure
1. Remove the paper feed roller and the feed
roller. (See "8.1. Replacing the paper feed roller
and the feed roller.")
2. Remove 2 double feed pressure springs [1].
[7]
3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the dou-
ble feed prevention shaft [3] and remove the
flange [4] and the double feed prevention roller
assembly [5].
4. Remove the double feed prevention roller [6]
from the double feed prevention roller assembly
[5].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

[1]
Note:
• Be sure to install the double feed prevention
roller [6] so that the paint mark [7] turns in the
direction shown in the drawing.
[1] [3] [2] [4] [6] [5] 8050ma3080

3-86
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 BYPASS TRAY

8.3 Replacing the paper feed


clutch /BP
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6): Every 2,000,000
copies in actual replacement count

B. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Pull out the ADU. (See "11.1. Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "10.2. Removing
and reinstalling the fixing unit.")
4. Remove 4 screws [1]. (1 screw is fixed from the
lower side of the ADU cover /R [2].)
5. After pulling out the ADU cover /R [2] halfway,
[1]
remove 2 relay connectors [3] and then remove
the ADU cover /R [2].

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
6. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the [1]
ADU release lever [5]. [2]
7. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the ADU
cover /L [7].

[7]

[6] [5] [4] [3] 8050ma3081

3-87 2
BYPASS TRAY KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

8. Remove a relay connector [1].


9. Remove the stop ring [2] and then remove the [3] [2]
paper feed clutch /BP (MC6) [3].
10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

[1] 8050ma3082

Note:
• When reinstalling the paper feed clutch /BP
[1]
(MC6) [1], be sure to set the stopper in the
detent groove [2].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[2] 8050ma3083

3-88
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE

9. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
9.1 Removing and reinstalling
the vertical conveyance
A. Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the side cover
/4 [2].
[4]
2. Loosen 2 screws [3] and remove the side cover
/5 [4].
[2]

[1]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3] 8050ma3170

3-89
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

3. Pull out the paper feed trays /1 [1], /2 [2] and /3


[3].
[5]
4. Loosen a screw [4].
5. Remove 3 screws [5].
6. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the side
cover /3 [7].
[6] [7]

[1]

[2]
[3]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[4]

8050ma3171

7. Push up the hooks [1] in 2 positions at both


sides, and separate the bypass up/down cover
[2] from the vertical conveyance section [3].

[3]

[2] [1] 8050ma3172

3-90
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE

8. Remove 7 screws [1].


9. Pull out the vertical conveyance section [2], [1]
remove a connector [3] and then remove the
vertical conveyance section [2].
10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
• When installing the vertical conveyance sec-
tion, be sure to fasten it with screws with the
vertical conveyance door closed.
[3]

[2] 8050ma3173e

III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-91 1
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

9.2 Replacing the intermediate


conveyance clutch /1
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13):
Every 2,000,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the vertical conveyance section.
2. Remove a connector [1].
3. Remove an E-ring [2] and then remove the [4]
spacer [3] and the gear [4].
4. Remove a stop ring [5] and then remove the
MC13 [6]. [3]
[7]
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note: [2]
• When reinstalling the clutch, be sure to check
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

that the stopper [7] of the MC13 is in the spec- [1]


ified position.

[6] [5] 8050ma3174

3-92
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

10. FIXING

Caution:
• The fixing unit is very hot immediately after
turning off the sub power switch (SW2). In
order to avoid getting burnt, be sure to start
operation after the temperature goes down
sufficiently.

10.1 Screws that must not be


removed
2 double nuts [1] are not allowed to be removed. Be
careful not to remove them. [1]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8050ma3153

3-93 1
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

10.2 Removing and reinstalling


the fixing unit
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the ADU.
3. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing
knob [2]. [3] [4] [1] [2]
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the fixing
cover /F [4].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

8050ma3098

5. Open the reverse section [1] and remove a


[1] [5] [5] [4]
screw [1] and 3 connectors [3]. And then
remove the fixing unit [4].

Note:
• When removing or reinstalling the fixing unit,
slide it toward front and raise it while holding
both ends [5] at front and rear.

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

[2] [3]

8050ma3099

3-94
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

10.3 Replacing the fixing upper


heater lamps /1 and /2
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2): Every 2,500,000 cop-
ies
• Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3): Every 2,500,000 cop-
ies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
cover /R [2].

Note: [2]
• Be careful not to touch the glass section of
the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This
may shorten the effective life of the heater
lamp.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing
or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to
contact and damage the inner surface of the
fixing roller.
• When the installation is completed, check to
8050ma3100
see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to
the fixing plate and the faston terminal is
properly installed.

3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web


motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at [3]
the 3 places.

[2]

[1] 8050ma3154

3-95
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper


unit [2].

Note:
• The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When
attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder sec-
tion securely into the screw hole.

[2]
[1]
[1]

8050ma3101
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

5. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] at the front, and a


clamp fixing screw [2], 2 faston terminals [3] and
a screw [4] at the rear. And then remove the fix-
ing plate [5] and pull out gently the fixing heater
lamps /1 and /2 [6] from the fixing roller /U [7] for
[1]
removal.

Note:
• When removing the faston terminal, be sure to
[2] [7]
hold it at the connector.

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


[3]
steps in reverse.
[6]
Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so
that the maker mark indication comes to the
rear.
• When reinstalling the fixing heater lamps,
please note that the lamp fitting holes on the
fixing plate are different. [5] [4] 8050ma3102

3-96
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

10.4 Replacing the fixing lower


heater lamp
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing lower lamp (L4): Every 2,500,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
cover /R [2].

Note: [2]
• Be careful not to touch the glass section of
the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This
may shorten the effective life of the heater
lamp.
[1]
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing
or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
contact and damage the inner surface of the
fixing roller.
• When the installation is completed, check to
8050ma3103
see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to
the fixing plate and the faston terminal is
properly installed.

3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web


motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at [3]
the 3 places.

[2]

[1] 8050ma3155

3-97
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper


unit [2].

Note:
• The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When
attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder sec-
tion securely into the screw hole.

[2]
[1]
[1]

8050ma3104
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

5. Remove the clamp fixing screw [1] and the con-


nector [2] at the front. [1]

[2] 8050ma3105

3-98
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

6. Remove a clamp screw [1], a connector [2] and


a screw [3] at the rear to remove the fixing plate [6] [5] [1]
[4]. And then pull out gently the fixing heater
lamp [5] from the fixing roller /L [6] for removal.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[3]
steps in reverse.

Note:
[2]
• Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so
that the maker mark indication comes to the
rear. [4]

8050ma3106

III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-99
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

10.5 Replacing the fixing roller /U,


ball bearing /U and the heat
insulating sleeve /U
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing roller /U: Every 100,000 copies
• Heat insulating sleeve /U: Every 600,000 copies
• Ball bearing /U: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure [1] [2]


1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the fixing unit
upper cover.

Note:
• When removing the fixing unit upper cover,
raise it up without tilting it to avoid damage to
the fixing roller /U.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3. Remove the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2.

8050ma3177

3-100
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

4. Remove the fixing upper lamps /1 and /2.


5. Remove the rear side O-ring [3].
Remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and
the ball bearing [5] at the rear side, from the fix-
ing roller /U [6].

Note:
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing roller.

6. Remove the fixing roller /U [6].


[3] [4] [5] [6]
7. Remove the O-ring [1] and then remove the fix- [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
ing gear [2].
8. After removing the O-ring [3] of front side,
remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and the
ball bearings /U [5] from the fixing roller /U [6].
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
• After replacing the fixing roller, check whether
the fixing temperature sensor /3 is contacting
with the roller.
• When fixing temperature sensor /3 is soiled [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum
cleaner and cleaning pad. [5]
• When having replaced the fixing roller /U, be [4]
sure to make adjustments by referring to the [3]
36 mode "8050 Adjustment item list." Other- 8050ma3108

wise, poor images may result.


• Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripher-
ies of the heat insulating sleeve with Multemp
FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it.
• When reinstalling them, be sure to take note
of the directions of the ball bearing and the
flange of the heat insulating sleeve. Reinstall
them so that their upper surface turns to the
inside as seen in the picture in which they are
arranged after disassembly.

3-101
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

10.6 Replacing the fixing roller /L,


ball bearing /L and the heat
insulating sleeve /L
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing roller /L: Every 100,000 copies
• Heat insulating sleeve /L: Every 600,000 copies
• Ball bearing /L: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove the fixing cover /R.
3. Open the fixing upper unit.
(See "10.4. Replacing the fixing lower heater
lamp.")
4. Remove the fixing lower heater lamp.
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
entrance plate /L [2]. [2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

Note:
• Be careful not to damage the paper passage
section of the entrance plate /L.
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing rollers /U and /L with the entrance plate
/L.

[1] 8050ma3109

1 3-102
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

6. After loosening the stopper screw [1] once,


open the fixing paper exit guide [2] up to the [3] [2]
turnout position and retighten it temporarily and
then remove the fixing roller /L [3].

Note:
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing roller.

[1]
[1]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8050ma3110

7. Remove the ball bearings /L [1], 1 each at both


[3]
sides, and the heat insulating sleeves /L [2], 1
each at both sides, from the fixing roller /L.
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripher-
ies of the heat insulating sleeve with Multemp
FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it.
• When reinstalling them, be sure to take note
of the directions of the ball bearing and the
flange of the heat insulating sleeve.
• After replacing the fixing roller/r, check
whether the fixing temperature sensor /4 is in [2]
touch with the roller. [1]
• When fixing temperature sensor /4 is soiled
with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum
cleaner and cleaning pad.

8050ma3111

3-103
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

10.7 Replacing the fixing temper-


ature sensor /3, and remov-
ing and reinstalling the fixing
temperature sensor /1 and
the thermostat /1

Caution:
• After installing the fixing temperature sensor
/3, be sure to check that the sensor section is
in touch with the fixing roller. If not, the tem-
perature control may go abnormal or the fix-
ing temperature sensor /3 may detect the low
fixing temperature abnormality.
• Be sure to check that the wiring harness is
not in touch with the fixing roller.

Caution:
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

• The thermostat /1 is an essential safety part.


Be sure to follow the cautions and steps
given below when removing and reinstalling
(SP00-0030).

Caution:
• After completion of the installation of the
thermostat /1, be sure to check that the wir-
ing harness is not in touch with the fixing
upper roller.
• Be sure to fasten the thermostat /1 after posi-
tioning it properly with a positioning jig
(65AAJG021). Be sure to apply screws with
screw lock paint. Also be sure to conduct this
adjustment under the pressure-released con-
dition and the temperature low condition of
the fixing roller /U.

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle


• Fixing temperature sensor /3: Every 2,500,000
copies

3-104
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing tempera-


ture sensor /3)
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
upper cover [2]. [1] [2]

8050ma3112

3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1] and the connector

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]. [1] [2]

8050ma3113

4. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing


temperature sensor /3 [2]. [2] [1]

Note:
• When reinstalling it, check that the sensor
section of the fixing temperature sensor is in
touch with the fixing roller.

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

8050ma3114

3-105
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling


the fixing temperature sensor /1)
1. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the
mounting board [2] of the fixing temperature [2] [1]
sensor /1.

8050ma3115

2. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing


temperature sensor /1 [2]. [1] [2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

Note:
• Be careful not to change the position of the
set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /1.
• Be careful not to damage the internal surface
of the sensor.
• A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling
it.

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.
8050ma3139

D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /1)


1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2]
of the thermostat /1 and then remove the ther- [1] [2]
mostat section.

[1]

8050ma3116

3-106
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ther-


mostat /1 [3] from the thermostat mounting [1] [2]
board [2].

[3] 8050ma3117

E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat)


1. Fasten the thermostat /1 [2] with 2 screws [1].
[2]

[1]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8050ma3118

2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board [2] with 2


screws [1].
3. Connect 2 faston terminals [3] to the thermostat
/1.

[2] [1]

[3]

8050ma3119

3-107
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4. With a thermostat positioning jig (65AAJG021)


set between the thermostat /1 [1] and the fixing
upper roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting
board with 2 screws so that the mounting board
[1]
becomes the same thickness as the positioning
jig.
5. There are three types of jigs A, B and C of differ-
ent thickness.
The usage of each thickness is as follows.
[3]
• A section: Must get into the gap between the fix-
ing upper roller and the thermostat /1
after adjustment.
[2]
• B section: Used when positioning the thermostat
/1.
• C section: Must not get into the gap between the
fixing upper roller and the thermostat
/1 after adjustment. B

C
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

A
8050ma3179

6. The dimensions of the fixing upper roller and the


thermostat /1 are as shown below. a
• Specification: a = 3.1 ± 0.2 mm

[1]

[2] 8050ma3120

7. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with


screw lock paint.

[1] 8050ma3121

1 3-108
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

10.8 Replacing the fixing temper-


ature sensor /4, and remov-
ing and reinstalling the fixing
temperature sensor /2 and
the thermostat /L

Caution:
• After reinstalling the fixing temperature sen-
sor /4, be sure to check that the sensor sec-
tion is in touch with the fixing roller. If not,
the temperature control may go abnormal or
the fixing temperature sensor /4 may detect
the low fixing temperature abnormality.
• Be sure to check that the wiring harness is
not in touch with the fixing roller.

Caution:
• The thermostat /L is an essential safety part.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Be sure to follow the cautions and steps
given below when removing and reinstalling
(SP00-0180).

Caution:
• After completion of the installation of the
thermostat /L, be sure to check that the wir-
ing harness is not in touch with the fixing
lower roller.
• Be sure to fasten the thermostat /L after posi-
tioning it properly with a positioning jig
(65AAJG031). Be sure to apply screws with
screw lock paint. And also be sure to conduct
this adjustment under the pressure-released
condition and the temperature low condition
of the fixing roller /L.

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle


• Fixing temperature sensor /4: Every 2,500,000
copies

3-109
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing tempera-


ture sensor /4)
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
entrance plate /L [2]. [2]
Note:
• Be careful not to damage the paper passage
section of the fixing admission plate /L [2].

[1] 8050ma3122

3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1], connector [2] and a


screw [3], and then remove the fixing tempera- [1]
ture sensor /4 [4].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

Note:
• When reinstalling it, be sure to check that the [3]
sensor section of the fixing temperature sen-
sor /4 is in touch with the fixing roller.
• Be sure to install the fixing lower roller so that
the lot No. impressed on its core metal sec-
tion comes to the front side of the fixing unit.
[4]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2] 8050ma3123

C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling


the fixing temperature sensor /2) [1]
1. Remove a clamp screw [1], connector [2] and 2
screws [3], and then remove the mounting
board [4] of the fixing temperature sensor /2.

[3] [2] 8050ma3124

1 3-110
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

2. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing


temperature sensor /2 [2].

Note:
• Be careful not to change the position of the
set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /2.
• Be careful not to damage the internal surface
of the sensor.
• A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling
it.

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal [1] [2] 8050ma3125

steps in reverse.

D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /L)


1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2]
of the thermostat /L and then remove the ther-
mostat section.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]

[2] 8050ma3126

3-111
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ther-


mostat /L [3] from the thermostat mounting [1]
board /L [2].

[3]
[2]

8050ma3127

E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat /


L)
1. Fasten the thermostat /L [2] with 2 screws [1].
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[2]

8050ma3128

2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board /L [2]


with 2 screws [1]. [3] [4]
3. Connect 2 faston terminals [4] to the thermostat
/L [3].

[2] [1] 8050ma3129

3-112
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

4. With a thermostat positioning jig (65AAJG031)


set between the thermostat /L [1] and the fixing
lower roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting
board /L with 2 screws so that the mounting
board becomes the same thickness as the posi- B
tioning jig.
C
5. There are three types of jigs A, B and C of differ-
ent thickness.
A
The usage of each thickness is as follows.
• A section: Must get into the gap between the fix-
[3]
ing upper roller and the thermostat /L
[2]
after adjustment.
• B section: Used when positioning the thermostat
/L.
• C section: Must not get into the gap between the
fixing upper roller and the thermostat
/L after adjustment.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1] 8050ma3180

6. The dimensions of the fixing upper roller and the


thermostat /L are as shown below.
• Specification: a = 2.7 ± 0.2 mm

[1]

[2] 8050ma3130

7. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with


screw lock paint.

[1] 8050ma3131

3-113 1
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

10.9 Replacing the fixing drive


gear
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing drive gear: Every 1,000,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove the connector [1] and a screw [2], and
then remove the PS16 (fixing pressure release [2] [5] [4]
sensor) [3].

Note:
• Be careful not to damage the PS16 [3].

3. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the


actuator [5].

Note:
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

• Be sure to take note of the direction of the


actuator when reinstalling it.

[3] [1] 8050ma3132

4. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web


motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at [3]
the 3 places.

[2]

[1] 8050ma3155e

1 3-114
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

5. Remove 3 screws [1] and the connector [2], and


then remove the fixing drive panel assembly [3].

[1]

[3]

[1]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]

8050ma3133

6. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the fixing


drive gear [2]. [2]
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• When installing the fixing drive gear, apply
Multemp FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) on it.

[1]

8050ma3134

3-115
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

10.10Replacing the fixing cleaning


unit
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing cleaning unit: Every 200,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then the remove the
fixing upper cover [2]. [1] [2]

Note:
• When removing the fixing upper cover, raise it
up without tilting it to avoid damage to the fix-
ing roller /U.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

8050ma3156

3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing


cleaning unit [2]. [2]

Note:
• Be sure to turn the web drive gear [3] to take
up the slack of the cleaning web before rein-
stalling it to the fixing unit.

[1] [3] 8050ma3157

3-116
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

• When reinstalling it to the fixing unit, be sure


to press it against the paper exit side [2] hori- [2] [1]
zontally while being careful that the paper
entrance prevention plate [1] does not get in
touch with the roller. This is because the
paper entrance prevention plate may cause
damage to the roller.

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

Note:
• After replacing the fixing cleaning unit, be
sure to reset the count of the fixing cleaning 8050ma3158

unit in accordance with the 25 mode "Parts


counter - Count of special parts."
If not, a problem such as image smudge may
arise because the web feed amount becomes
less than the set value or the machine dis-

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
plays the message "The fixing cleaning unit is
require to be replaced. Contact the service
manager or the authorized distributor” and is
disabled to copy or print.

3-117
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

10.11Replacing the fixing torque


limiter
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Fixing torque limiter: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Place it gently on an even table with its paper
feed side down.
3. Remove the E-ring [1].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[1] 8050ma3144

4. Slide the shaft [1] to the rear side, and pull it out
with the notch [2] of the shaft aligned with the [2] [1]
panel.

8050ma3145

3-118
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

5. Remove the E-ring [1].

[1] 8050ma3146

6. Remove the gear [1] and the fixing torque limiter


[2] and replace the fixing torque limiter with a
new one.

Note:

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
• The shaft [3] contains a pin [4]. Be careful that
the pin does not get lost.

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050ma3147

3-119
FIXING KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

10.12Replacing the paper exit


roller /Up (for the new type
only)
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Paper exit roller /Up: Every 200,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the ADU.
3. Open the reversal section [1].
[1] [5] [3]
4. Open the fixing paper exit guide [2] and insert a
driver [4] between the guide and the fixing sec-
tion main body [3] so that it does not close.

Note:
• When inserting a driver, be careful not to
come into contact with the fixing rollers /U [5]
and /L [6].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[6] [2] [4] 8050ma3215

2 3-120
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 FIXING

5. Remove the spring [1].


6. Remove the E-ring [2] and slide the shaft [3] in
the arrow-marked direction [4]. And then
remove the paper exit roller /Up assembly [5].

[1] [5] [2] [4]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3] 8050ma3216

7. Remove the 2 paper exit rollers /Up [2] from the


[2]
shaft [1].

Note:
• When the bearing [3] is being left in the fixing
roller /Up, be sure to remove it without fail,
since this is not to be replaced.

8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal [3]


[3] [1] 8050ma3217
steps in reverse.

3-121 2
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

11. REGISTRATION/ADU/
REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
11.1 Removing and reinstalling
the ADU
Note:
• In order to prevent the main body from falling
down, the process unit and the ADU are pro-
vided with a safety mechanism so that they
cannot be pulled out at the same time.
• If the process unit has been pulled out when
pulling out the ADU, be sure to put the pro-
cess unit back into the main body.
• When the ADU cannot be pulled out, be sure
to check the lock levers /1 and /2 to see if they
are deformed, and replace them if necessary.
(See "11.13 Replacing the lock levers /1 and /
2.")
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

A. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Release the lock and pull down the ADU release
lever [1] counterclockwise and pull out the ADU
[2].
3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "10.2. Removing
and reinstalling the fixing unit.")
4. Remove the ADU cover /R, ADU release lever
and the ADU cover /L. (See "8.3. Replacing the
paper feed clutch /BP.")
5. Remove the paper feed solenoid cover. (See
"8.1. Replacing the paper feed roller and the
feed roller.")
[1] [2] 8050ma3084

2 3-122
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

6. Remove 2 relay connectors [1].


7. Remove the screw [2] and then release the fix- [1]
ing of the ADU wiring harness assembly [3].

[2]

[3]

8050ma3085

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8. Remove 4 screws [1].
9. Remove the screw [2]. [1] [9]
10. Push back the ADU [6] so that each of the
screws [5] can be seen through the holes [4] in
the guide rail /L [3], and then remove the screws [7]
[5] one at a time.

Note: [10]
• Be careful not to remove black screws.

11. Pull out the ADU [6] once again and move the [8]
guide pin [8] of the guide rail /R [7] into the turn-
out place of the oblong hole [9].
12. Remove the ADU [6] from the guide rails /L [3]
and /R [7].

Note:
[6]
• When removing the ADU [6], please note that
this work requires two persons, with one per-
son at the paper feed side and the other at the [11]
paper exit side.
• When removing the ADU [6], a person at the
paper feed side must hold the ADU handle /R
[10]. [4] [5] [2] [3] 8050ma3086
• When removing the ADU [6], a person at the
paper exit side must hold the handle provided
at the center of the fixing positioning rail [11].

13. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

3-123
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

11.2 Replacing the registration


cleaning sheet
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Registration cleaning sheet: Every 600,000 cop-
ies

B. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Pull out the ADU. (See "11.1. Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the reg-
istration cleaning sheet [2]. [2]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[1] 8050ma3087

3-124
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

11.3 Replacing the separation


discharging plate unit
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Separation discharging plate unit: Every 100,000
copies

B. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Pull out the ADU. (See "11.1. Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "10.2. Removing
and reinstalling the fixing unit.")
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the transfer
[2]
release cover [2].

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1] 8050ma3176

5. Remove 2 separation fitting screws [2].


[2] [3]
6. Raise the separation discharging plate unit [2]
once, remove a faston [3] and then remove the
separation discharging plate unit [2].

Note:
• When removing the faston from the separa-
tion discharging plate unit, be sure to pull out
straight the faston cover section.

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

Note: [1] 8050ma3088

• When reinstalling the separation discharging


plate unit, be sure to fasten in advance the
separation fitting screw on the front side for
positioning.

3-125 2
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

11.4 Replacing the transfer


ground plate unit and the
2nd transfer roller /L
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Transfer ground plate unit: Every 1,000,000 cop-
ies
• 2nd transfer roller /L: Every 200,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the separation discharging plate unit
[1]. (See "11.3. Replacing the separation dis-
charging plate unit.") [4]
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the
transfer ground plate unit [3].
3. Remove 2 stop rings [5].
4. Slide each of 2 bearings [6] to the outside and
remove the 2nd transfer roller /L [4].
5. Remove 2 bearings [6] from the 2nd transfer
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

roller /L [4]. [1] [6]


6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• Be careful not to touch with bare hands the
2nd transfer roller /L [4] on any sections other
than the shaft section.
• When installing the 2nd transfer roller /L, [6] [5]
install it with the dent on the roller shaft [2] [3] [5] 8050ma3089

comes to the rear of the machine (instead of


coming to the side contacting with the trans-
fer earth plate).

3-126
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

11.5 Replacing the registration


roller
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Registration roller: Every 1,500,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the registration cleaning sheet. (See
"11.2 Replacing the registration cleansing
sheet.")
2. Remove the ADU cover /R, the ADU release
lever and the ADU cover /L. (See "8.3. Replac-
ing the paper feed clutch /BP.")
3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the ter-
minal cover [2] (for the new type only).

Note:
• When reinstalling it, be sure to set the projec-
tion [3] of the terminal cover to the position- [4] [2]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
ing hole [4].

[3] [1] 8050ma3207

3-127 2
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the


gear cover [2].
5. Remove the relay connector [3].
[6]
6. Remove the stop rings [4], 1 each, and then [7]
remove the bearings [5], 1 each provided at
front and rear.
7. Remove the 2 screws [6] and then remove the
registration unit [7].

Note: [2] [8]


• When removing the registration unit [7], open [3] [6] [1]
the conveyance guide plate /U [8] and slide
the registration unit to the rear side of the
ADU. And then pull out the shaft on this side
from the ADU panel to remove it.

[5] [4]
[5] [4] 8050ma3208
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

2 3-128
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

«New type»
8. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the reg-
istration gear [2] and the pin [3]. [5]

Note:
• When installing the registration gear [2], be
sure to install the pin [3] without fail.

9. Remove the 2 registration pressure springs [4].


10. Remove the 2 E-rings [5] and the 2 bearings [6].

[6] [4]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1] [3] [2]

[5] [4] [6] 8050ma3209

3-129 2
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

11. Undo the hook [2] of the registration restriction


spring [1] and remove the registration roller [3].

[3]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[1] [2] 8050ma3210

2 3-130
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

12. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the


spacers /1 [3] and /2 [4], the registration restric-
tion plate [5] (with the registration restriction [2]
spring [6] attached), the torque limiter [7]and the
pin /A [8] from the registration roller [2].

Note:
• When reinstalling the registration restriction
plate, be sure to set the detent hole [9] to the
projection [10] of the torque limiter.
[1]
13. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• When reinstalling the registration unit, be
careful not to damage the paper through sur-
face of the guide plate.
• Be sure to install the registration pressure

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
spring at its original position.
[10] [5] [4]
[3]

[7]

[6]

[9]

[8] 8050ma3211

3-131 2
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

«Old type»
8. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the reg-
istration gear [2] and the pin [3]. [5]
[6]
Note:
• When installing the registration gear [2], be
sure to install the pin [3] without fail.

[7]
9. Remove the 2 registration pressure springs [4]. [4]
10. Remove the 2 E-rings [5] and the 2 bearings [6]
and then remove the registration roller [7].
11. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• When reinstalling the registration unit, be
careful not to damage the paper through sur- [3]
face of the guide plate.
• Be sure to install the registration pressure
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

spring at its original position.

[6]
[1] [2] [5] [4] 8050ma3091

2 3-132
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

11.6 Replacing the intermediate


conveyance clutches /2 and /3
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4):
Every 2,000,000 copies
• Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5):
Every 2,000,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the ADU cover /R. (See "8.3. Replac-
ing the paper feed clutch /BP")
2. Remove a relay connector [1].
[5] [6]
3. Remove the stop ring [2] and then remove the
intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) [3].
4. Remove a relay connector [4].
5. Remove the stop ring [5] and then remove the
intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) [6].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
steps in reverse.

Note:
• When reinstalling the MC4 and MC5, be sure
to take note of the position of the stopper.
[2] [3]
[4] [1] 8050ma3092

3-133
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

11.7 Replacing the ADU convey-


ance clutches /1 and /2
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1):
Every 2,000,000 copies
• ADU pre-registration clutch (MC2):
Every 2,000,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the ADU release lever and the ADU
cover /L (See "8.3. Replacing the paper feed
clutch /BP").
2. Remove a relay connector [1].
[5] [6] [1]
3. Remove the stop ring [2] and then remove the
ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) [3].
4. Remove a relay connector [4].
5. Remove the stop ring [5] and then remove the
ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) [6].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

Note:
• When reinstalling the MC1 and MC2, be sure
to take note of the position of the stopper.
[3]
[4] [2] 8050ma3093

3-134
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

11.8 Replacing the ADU pre-regis-


tration clutch
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3):
Every 2,000,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the ADU cover /R, ADU release lever
and the ADU cover /L. (See "8.3. Replacing the
paper feed clutch /BP.")
2. Remove two relay connectors [1].
3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the ADU [3] [1]
lock section [3].

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] 8050ma3094

4. Remove the stop ring [1] and then remove the


[1]
ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) [2].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

Note:
• When reinstalling the ADU lock section, be
sure to take note of the stopper position of the
the MC3.

[2] 8050ma3095

3-135
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

11.9 Replacing the decurler roller


A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Decurler roller: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU. (See "11.1. Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
2. Remove the fixing unit. (See "10.2. Removing
and reinstalling the fixing unit.")
3. Remove the paper exit drive belt /1 [1].
4. Remove 3 screws [2] and the screw [3], and the
remove the paper exit guide plate /4 assembly
[4].

Note:
• The screw [2] and the screw [3] are different in
length. Be sure to take note of the position of
the screw [3] when reinstalling the assembly.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[4] [3]
[2]

[1]

[2] 8050ma3096

3-136
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the


knob [2]. [16] [13] [12] [9] [17]
6. Remove the paper exit mounting plate /F [3] and
the paper exit open/close spring /F [4].
7. Remove two screw [5] and then remove the
bearing [6].
8. Remove the E-ring [7] and then remove the
paper exit drive pulley /1 [8] and the pin [9].
9. Remove the E-ring [10] and then remove the
paper exit drive gear /4 [11] and the pin [12]. [15] [14] [11] [10] [8] [7]
10. Remove the bearing [13], paper exit mounting
plate /R [14], curler /1 [15] and the paper exit
open/close spring /R [16].
11. Slide the bearing [17] to the inside and remove
the decurler [18].
12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

[5] [6] [5] [18]


Note:

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
• When reinstalling the paper exit drive pulley /1
[8], be sure to take note of the direction of the
belt guide.
• When the decurler roller is replaced, reset "5.
[4]
Parts counter" and "1. Count of special
parts." If not, the fixing jam may occur.

[2] [1] [3] 8050ma3097

3-137
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

11.10Replacing the paper exit


guide roller /2
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Paper exit guide roller /2: Every 200,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the 11 screws [1] and then remove the
side cover /L [2]. [2]
2. Pull out the ADU. (See "11.1. Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")

[1]

[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[1] 8050ma3181

3. Remove the 2 connectors [1].


4. Remove the 4 screws [2].

[2]

[2]

[1] 8050ma3182

2 3-138
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

5. Lower the front side [2] of the paper exit unit [1]
and pull out the paper exit unit [1] to this side [6]
with the hook [3] at the slant.
6. Bring the paper exit unit [1] back to the horizon- [3]
tal position and remove the belt [7] from the pul-
ley [5] toward the rear side [6].

[5] [7] [1]

[2]

[4]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8050ma3183

7. Pull out once the rear side of the paper exit unit
[1] toward this side and remove the pin [2] while
keeping it from coming into contact with the
main body. [2]

[1] 8050ma3184

3-139 1
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

8. After removing the connector [1], remove the 2


screws [2] and then remove the sensor support [2] [3]
plate /A [3]. (For the new type only)

[1] 8050ma3218

9. Remove the 3 screws [1] and then remove the


duct [2]. (For the new type only) 2 [1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[2] 8050ma3212

2 3-140
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

10. Remove the screw [1] at each location, and then


remove the 4 paper exit guide roller holders [2]. [3] [1] [3]
11. Remove the 2 paper exit guide roller /2 assem-
blies [4] from the spring [3].

Note:
• After installing the paper exit guide roller
holder [2] at the lower section of the sensor
[5], check to see if the actuator [6] runs with-
out a hitch.
[2]

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[5] [4] [4]

[6]

[2]

8050ma3185

3-141 2
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

12. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2], and
New type
then remove the driven roller [3].
13. Remove the bearing [4] and the 2 E-rings [5], 2 [3] [5] [6] [8]
and then remove the paper exit guide roller /2
[6].
14. Remove the 2 E-rings [7] and then remove the
paper exit guide roller /2 [8].
15. In conformance to Steps 12 to 14, remove the 2
paper exit guide rollers /1 from the other paper
exit roller guide /2 assembly.
16. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[3] [4] [7]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[1] [2] [5] [7] 8050ma3213

Old type

[3] [5] [6] [8]

[4] [7]

[3]

[1] [2] [5] 8050ma3186

2 3-142
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

11.11 Replacing the paper exit


roller
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Paper exit roller:
Every 1,000,000 copies (Old type)
Every 200,000 copies (New type)

B. Procedure
1. Remove the paper exit unit. (See "11.10.
Replacing the paper exit guide roller /2.")
2. Remove the connector [1].
3. Remove the E-ring [2] and then remove the gear
[3] and the pin [4].
4. Remove the 4 screws [5] and the 2 screws [6],
and then remove the paper exit guide plate /U
[7].

Note:

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[7] [8] [6]
• When placing the removed paper exit guide
plate /U [7] on the desk, be careful not to
cause any damage to the guide roller [8] and
the paper-through surface.

[5] [1]

[3]

[2]

[4]

8050ma3187

3-143 2
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

«Old type»
5. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the
bearing [2]. [2]
6. Remove the E-ring [3] and then remove the
bearing [4].
7. Remove the 4 screws [5] and then remove the
paper exit holder /F [6]. [1]
8. Remove the paper exit roller [7].
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse. [6]

[5]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[7]

[4]

[3]

8050ma3188

2 3-144
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

«New type»
5. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the
[3] [2] [1]
spacer [2].
6. Remove the bearing [3].
7. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the
spacer [5].
8. Remove the bearing [6].
9. Remove the 2 screws [7] and the 2 screws [8],
and then remove the paper exit attaching plate /
F [9].

Note:
• The screw [7] and the screw [8] are different in
length. Take not of them when reinstalling the
plate. [8]
Screw [7] (shorter)
Screw [8] (longer)

10. Remove the paper exit roller [10].

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
11. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

[6] [10] [4] [7] [9]

[5] 8050ma3219

3-145 2
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

11.12Replacing the paper presser


roller
Note:
• The paper presser roller is not installed to the
finisher-connected machine, and this is not
included in the periodically replaced parts.

A. Periodically replaced part/cycle


• Paper presser roller: Every 200,000 copies

B. Procedure
1. Remove the side cover /L. (See "11.10. Replac-
ing the paper exit guide roller /2")
2. Remove the screw [1] at each location and then
remove the 2 paper presser roller assemblies [1]
[2].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

[2] 8050ma3189

3. Pull out the shaft [2] after removing the E-ring


[1], and then remove the paper presser roller [3]. [2]
4. In compliance to Step 3, remove the paper
presser roller from the other paper presser roller
assembly.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.

[3]

[1] 8050ma3190

2 3-146
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

11.13Replacing the lock levers 1/


and /2
Note:
• The main body may fall down when the pro-
cess unit and the ADU are pulled out at the
same time. The lock levers /1 and /2 are a
safety mechanism to prevent such an occa-
sion like this so that the process unit and the
ADU cannot be pulled out at the same time.
When the process unit and the ADU cannot be
pulled out separately, it can be considered
that the lock levers /1 and /2 are deformed due
to improper operations of some kind. So, they
must be replaced.
• The lock levers /1 and /2 are not the parts that
require a regular maintenance operation, and
a reinstallation method is not employed that
foresees any replacement operations. So, the

III DIS./ASSEMBLY
replacement operations are forced to be con-
ducted in a condition in which an object part
cannot be seen clearly. Be sure to conduct the
operations only after having a good under-
standing of the condition in which each part is
installed, while referring to the picture depict-
ing each procedure.

3-147 2
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

A. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
[6] [5]
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. While releasing the lock of the ADU release
lever, bring down the ADU release lever coun-
terclockwise and pull out the ADU until the
screw [1] can be accessed. (See "11.1. Remov-
ing and reinstalling the ADU.")

Note:
• The ADU cannot be pulled out depending on a
condition of deformation of the lock levers /1
[2] and /2 [3]. However, be sure to apply a little
more force to secure space that allows the [3] [5] [1] [2]
access to the screw [1].

[4]
3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the
stopper [4].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

Note:
• When installing the stopper [4], be sure to set [2]
[3]
the projection [5] to the positioning hole [6].

4. When removing the stopper [4], force applied on [7]


[1] [3] [8]
the lock levers /1 [2] and /2 [3] are taken off. Pull
further out the ADU [7] only.

Note:
• Since the main body may fall down, be abso-
lutely sure not to pull out the process unit.
[9]

5. Remove the E-ring [8] and then remove the lock


lever /2 [3]. [12] [10] [11]
6. Remove the spring [9] from the lock lever /2 [3].

Note:
• When replacing it, take note of the direction of
the installation of the spring [9] and the posi-
tion in which the hook is installed. [13]

7. Remove the 3 screws [10] and then remove the


lever reinforcing plate [11].
8. Remove the E-ring [12] and then remove the [2] 8050ma3220
lock lever /1 [2].
9. Remove the spring [13] from the lock lever /1
[2].

2 3-148
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

Note:
• When replacing it, take note of the direction of
the installation of the spring [13] and the posi-
tion in which the hook is installed.

10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal


steps in reverse.

III DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-149
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

Blank page

3-150
Index

SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE

8050/CF5001
C500
8150

2004. 12
Ver. 3.0
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS


Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing ser-
vice work.

IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while ser-
vicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND


CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “ CAUTION” is defined
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.

DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury


WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:

:Precaution when using the copier. General precaution Electric hazard High temperature

:Prohibition when using the copier.


General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble

:Direction when using the copier.


General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth

S-1 1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY WARNINGS

1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY


KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design
and a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects
have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unau-
thorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.

PROHIBITED ACTIONS

DANGER

• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.

• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-
der or similar object.

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.

• Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT

• Using parts not specified by KMBT

1 S-2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Konica Minolta brand copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met,
in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily
use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability,
the CE must perform regular safety checks.

2.1 Power Supply

Connection to Power Supply

WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedi-
cated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consump-
tion.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. kw

• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.

• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as the
plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power
supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or elec-
tric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact quali-
fied electrician for the installation.

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.

Ground Lead

WARNING
• Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done

S-3 2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Ground Lead

WARNING
• Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)

Power Plug and Cord

WARNING
• For the products that use the power cord set (inlet type), be sure to follow the
directions given below.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture prop-
erly.
a. Be sure to check to see if the power cord is securely inserted into the
main body side inlet.
b. When the fixing of the cord is indicated in the installation instructions,
be sure to fix it securely by using the fixing materials provided in the
same package.
c. When the power cord is damaged with its sheath broken, be sure to
replace it with the specified power cord set.
When the power cord is not securely inserted, an abnormal heat may gen-
erates due to a poor contact of the cord, thus resulting in a fire.

• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.


Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

2 S-4
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Power Plug and Cord

WARNING

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.

• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.

• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.

Wiring

WARNING

• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-
let.
If used, the risk of fire exists.

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.


Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.

2.2. Installation Requirements

Prohibited Installation Place

WARNING
• Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.

• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.

S-5 2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

When not using product for a long time

WARNING

• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.

Ventilation

CAUTION
• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time

Fixing

CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.

Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.

• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from


the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still pow-
ered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.

2 S-6
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.


You may get burnt.

Work Performed with the Copier Powered

WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.

• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.

• Be careful not to drop metal chips such as a clip, staple and/or a screw into
the inside of the product or its gaps.
A short circuit may occurs inside the product, thus resulting in an electric
shock and/or a fire.

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.


Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-
trode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.


Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.

S-7 2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make
sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.

• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.

• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-
fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.

• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.

• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).

• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-
inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.

2 S-8
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Consumables

WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.


You may be burned due to dust explosion.

HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS


• When solution is used for cleaning, be sure to unplug the power cord from
the power outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.

• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
A risk of fire exists.

• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
A risk of fire exists.

• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.


Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.

S-9 2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY INFORMATION

IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-
keted in the United States.

This copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.


Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user opera-
tion.

S-10
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious accidents.

• Overall protection circuit


• Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit

These safety circuits are described below to provide the service engineer with a renewed awareness of them in order to pre-
vent servicing errors that may impair their functions.

1. Overall protection circuit

CBR1

NF

CBR2

8050sf001

1.1 Protection by circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) and circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)


CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instantaneously when an excessive current flows due to a short in the AC
line.

CAUTION:
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

S-11
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2. Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating
prevention circuit

PRCB ACDB

TH1 L2 TS1

TH3 AC driver L3
FHCB
Control section
TH2 section
TS2
L4
TH4
RL1
RL1 8050sf002e

2.1 Protection by software


The output voltage from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) is read by the
CPU. If this voltage is abnormal, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening main relay (RL1).

CAUTION:
• The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with
the specified clearances.
• The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

2.2 Protection by the hardware circuit


The output voltages from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2), fixing temperature
sensor /3 (TH3), and fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) are compared with the abnormality judgment reference
value in the comparator circuit. If the output voltage from TH1, TH2, TH3, or TH4 exceeds the reference value, L2,
L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening RL1.

CAUTION:
• The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with
the specified clearances.
• Periodically check the contact between the fixing upper roller and TH3 and the contact
between the fixing lower roller and TH4, and replace them if any abnormality is detected.
• The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

2.3 Protection by thermostat /1 (TS1) and thermostat /2 (TS2)


When the temperature of the fixing upper roller exceeds the specified value, TS1 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the
power to L2 and L3 directly. When the temperature of the fixing lower roller exceeds the specified value, TS2 is
turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L4 directly.

CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2.

S-12
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE


Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric
shock.

8050sf003e

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

S-13
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

8050sf004e

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

S-14
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

8050sf005e

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

S-15
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

8050sf006e

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

2 S-16
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

8050sf007e

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

PS

Unplug the machine before removing platen glass.

Debrancher le copieur avant de retirer la vitre d'exposition.

Desenchufe la maquina antes de quitar el vidrio.


~
Desconecte a unidade da tomada antes de remover o vidro de exposicao.

8050sf008e

S-17 1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

8050sf009

CAUTION

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.

2 S-18
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 CONTENTS

CONTENTS

I ADJUSTMENT
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

II SERVICE TOOL
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Composition of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Notation of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix
Measures to take in case of an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi

III SERVICE
List of major differences between the old type and the new type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

I ADJUSTMENT
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

IV JAM CODE LIST


3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
4. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
4.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
5.1 Checking method of the P function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
6. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
6.1 List of adjustment items for 25 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
6.2 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
V ERROR CODE LIST
6.3 Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
6.4 Paper size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
6.4.1 Standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
6.4.2 Non-standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
6.4.3 Wide paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
6.5 PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
6.5.1 Count reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
6.5.2 Change setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
6.6 Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
6.7 Parts counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
VI DIAGRAMS

6.7.1 Count of special parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40


6.7.2 Count of each parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
6.8 Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

i 2
CONTENTS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

6.9 Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49


6.10 M/C serial number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
I ADJUSTMENT

6.11 Indication of ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50


6.12 KRDS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
6.13 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
6.14 Setting date input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
6.15 Board change mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
7. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
7.1 Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
7.2 Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
II SERVICE TOOL

7.2.1 High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53


7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
7.2.3 Sensor output check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
7.2.5 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
7.3 Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
7.3.1 Magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
7.3.2 Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
7.3.3 RADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
III SERVICE

7.3.4 Centring adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78


7.3.5 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
7.3.6 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81
7.4 Image quality adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
IV JAM CODE LIST

7.4.4 Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89


7.4.5 Image judge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
7.4.6 ACS adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
7.4.7 Density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
7.4.8 Tone adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
7.4.9 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-95
7.5 Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
7.5.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
V ERROR CODE LIST

7.6 Test pattern output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97


7.7 Test pattern density setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106
7.8 Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106
7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (PI-110 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TU-109/TMG-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
VI DIAGRAMS

7.9 List output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112


8. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
8.1 47 mode/multi mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113

2 ii
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 CONTENTS

8.2 Adjustment data display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114


8.3 Hard disk check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114

I ADJUSTMENT
8.4 Input check list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116
8.5 Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
9.1 Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
9.2 Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (bypass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140
9.3 Pick-up movement amount adjustment (bypass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142
9.4 Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-143
9.5 Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144

II SERVICE TOOL
9.6 FNS adjustment of the bypass conveyance guide plate magnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146
9.7 FNS adjustment of the bypass gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-147
9.8 FNS adjustment of the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-149
9.9 FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-152
9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate /U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-154
9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate /L (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606) . . . . . . . 1-156
9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158
9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160

III SERVICE
9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606). . . . . . . 1-168
9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606). . . . . . . . . 1-170
9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-172
9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-holding position (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-173
9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-174
9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-178
9.21 LCT tray mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179

IV JAM CODE LIST


9.22 LCT skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-181
9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183
9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-184
9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185
9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-186
9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188

II SERVICE TOOL V ERROR CODE LIST


1. Description of the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.1 Board used for the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.2 Data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.3 ISW transfer type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.4 Instances of ISW transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
1.1.5 Setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2. USB ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.1 What is the USB ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
VI DIAGRAMS

3. INTERNET ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11


3.1 What is the Internet ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
3.2 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
3.3 Main features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

iii 2
CONTENTS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

3.4 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12


3.4.1 Setting on Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
I ADJUSTMENT

3.4.2 Setting on Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12


3.5 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
3.5.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
3.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
3.6 Internet ISW using Web utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
3.6.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
3.6.2 How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
3.7 Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
II SERVICE TOOL

3.7.1 Prior announcement to administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29


3.7.2 If power failure occurs during data rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
3.7.3 ISW of multiple programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
3.7.4 If ISW fails in low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
3.8 Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
3.8.1 What is a proxy server? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
3.8.2 Authentication of proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
3.8.3 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
3.8.4 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
III SERVICE

4. MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32


4.1 What is the Mail remote notification system?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
4.2 Operation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
4.3 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
4.4 How to use the Mail remote notification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
4.5 Disabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
IV JAM CODE LIST

III SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1 Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.2 Maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
1.3 Periodic check items (main body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
1.4 Periodic check items (DF-319/AFR-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
1.5 Periodic check items (LT-211/C-208) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
1.6 Periodic check items (FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
V ERROR CODE LIST

1.7 Periodic check items (PI-110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14


1.8 Periodic check items (TU-109/TMG-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
1.9 Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
1.10 Important maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
2. COPY MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2.1 Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2.2 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2.3 PM parts kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
VI DIAGRAMS

4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

2 iv
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 CONTENTS

IV JAM CODE LIST

I ADJUSTMENT
1. JAM CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

V ERROR CODE LIST


1. ERROR CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

II SERVICE TOOL
1.1 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1.2 DF-319/AFR-20 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
1.3 LT-211/C-208 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
1.4 FS-115/FS-215/FN-120/FN-9/FS-513/FS-606 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
1.5 TU-109/TMG-3 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
1.6 PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
2.1 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
2.1.1 Relay connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

III SERVICE
2.1.2 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
2.2 DF-319/AFR-20 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
2.3 LT-211/C-208 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
2.4 FS-115/FS-215/FN-120/FN-9/FS-513/FS-606 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
2.5 TU-109/TMG-3 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
2.6 PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
3. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53

IV JAM CODE LIST


3.1 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
3.2 DF-319/AFR-20 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
3.3 LT-211/C-208 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
3.4 FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
3.5 TU-109/TMG-3 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
3.6 PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
4.1 DF-319/AFR-20 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69 V ERROR CODE LIST
4.2 LT-211/C-208 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
4.3 FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
4.4 TU-109/TMG-3 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
4.5 PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
5. APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1
5.1 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1
5.2 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-3
5.3 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-5
5.4 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (4/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-7
VI DIAGRAMS

5.5 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (5/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-9


5.6 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (6/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-11
5.7 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (7/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-13
5.8 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (8/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-15

v 2
CONTENTS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004
I ADJUSTMENT
II SERVICE TOOL
III SERVICE

Blank page
IV JAM CODE LIST
V ERROR CODE LIST
VI DIAGRAMS

vi
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Introduction

Introduction

Revision history

After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement
of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.

When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued
with a revision mark added as required.

Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show to the left of the revised section.
A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made.

• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.

Note:
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
• The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
• The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.

2004/12 3.0 Change of design and correction of errors in writing


2004/04 2.0 Change of design and correction of errors in writing
2003/08 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Service
Date Revision mark Descriptions of revision
manual Ver.

vii
Introduction KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Composition of the service manual

This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:

<Theory of Operation section>


I OUTLINE: System configuration, product specifications, unit configuration, paper
path, drive system, and image creation process *
II UNIT EXPLANATION: Configuration of each unit, explanation of the operating system, and
explanation of the control system
III DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY: Removal/reinstallation method of periodically replaced parts and
major parts.
As information for the CE to have a better understanding of the product, this part outlines the object of each
functions, its role, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing
of the operations of each part, and then explains the removal and reinstallation procedure of the periodically
replaced parts and the major parts.

The contents of * are described only in the service manual of the main body.

<Field service section>


I ADJUSTMENT: General description of items to be adjusted, 25 mode, 36 mode, 47
mode, and other adjustments (mechanical adjustments)
II SERVICE TOOL: Various types of ISW *, and mail remote notification system
III SERVICE: Service schedule, copy materials, service materials, and CE tools *
IV JAM CODE LIST: List of jam codes, causes, operations when a jam occurs, and removal
methods
V ERROR CODE LIST: List of error codes, causes, operations when a warning is issued, and
expected defective parts
VI DIAGRAMS: Parts layout drawing, connector layout drawing, timing chart, and
overall wiring diagram
As information that the CE requires at the job site (customer's premise), this part explains the service sched-
ule and its contents, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.

viii
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Introduction

Notation of the service manual

1. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
(1) IC board: Standard printer
(2) KonicaMinolta 8050/CF5001/bizhub PROC500/8150:
Main body or this machine
(3) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
When the description is made in combination of the OS's mentioned above:
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP

2. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered
trademark of each company.

3. Electrical parts and signals


Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.

Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description


IN
PS
Sensor PS Door PS1 Sensor detection signal
SIG
102 PS
24V Power to drive the solenoid
Solenoid SD DRV
Drive signal
SOL
24V Power to drive the clutch
Clutch CL DRV
Drive signal
SOL
24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1
Motor M
DRV2
Drive signals of two kinds
D1
D2

ix
Introduction KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description


_U
_V
_W
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1

D2
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV Ā
Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
DRV B
Motor, phases A and B control signals
DRV B̄
A
Motor M
/A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S
Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
Ground
PG, P.GND Power ground
DCD Data carrier detection
SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
Serial
DSR, DSET Data set ready
communication
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data

x
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Measures to take in case of an accident

Measures to take in case of an accident

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emer-
gency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be car-
ried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-
site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in "Serious Acci-
dent Report/Follow-up Procedures."

xi
List of major differences KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

List of major differences between the old type and the new type

Classification Old type New type


Material Developer (each Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
color)
Toner (each color) Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
Drum Common to Old type/New type
Registration/ Registration roller Torque limiter not provided Torque limiter provided
ADU/Reverse/ ADU reverse roller Rubber roller Spike roller (metal)
Paper exit (Driven roller is of resin) (Driven roller is of rubber)
Reverse/exit roller /2 Rubber roller Spike roller (metal)
(Driven roller is of resin) (Driven roller is of rubber)
Paper exit roller Normal Surface fluorine-treated
Periodic replace- Every 1,000,000 copies/prints Every 200,000 copies/prints
ment cycle of paper *1
exit roller
Exit paper upper Not provided Provided
face cooling fan
Secondary Secondary transfer White Black
transfer pressure cam Cam distance: Small Cam distance: Large
Spring pressure: Large Spring pressure: Small
Control Printer control Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
board
Printer control pro- Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
gram
Image control pro- Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
gram
Fixing Paper exit roller /Up Resin roller Ceramic coated roller
Paper exit roller / — Every 200,000 copies/prints
Up replacement
cycle

*1 For the old type, the paper exit roller is replaced only when it is provided with a kit against uneven wax.

The discrimination of the old type from the new type is made according to the list of product numbers as
shown below. The judgement is made based on the upper 4-digit alphanumeric characters of the serial num-
ber.
And also in this manual the model name is not given, but only "Old type" and "New type" given.

Product number
Model name
Old type New type
8050 65AE, 65AJ, 65AF, 65AN, 65AK, 65AT, 65AP 65LT, 65LU
CF5001 65BE, 65BF 65LQ
C500 — 65LE, 65LF, 65LJ, 65LN, 65LG
8150 — 65LK, 65LP

2 xii
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION

I ADJUSTMENT is shut off. So, be sure to unplug the power cord


from the power outlet. Also, when operating the

I ADJUSTMENT
machine with the power supplied, be careful of
1. HOW TO USE THE the scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to
get caught by the gear.
ADJUSTMENT SECTION
2. The fixing section may be very hot. Be careful
1.1 Composition not to get burnt when handling it.
3. The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be
This part "Adjustment" describes items to be careful not to bring a watch and instrument near
adjusted and their method of adjustment that are to the unit.
required by this machine and gives detailed expla- 4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
nations. 5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare
hands.
A. Checking before starting work
When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary
to check in advance the following: 2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN
REPLACING PARTS
1. Are the power source and voltage secured in
accordance with the specifications?
2. Is the power source properly grounded? Adjustments and setting are required when there
3. Is any equipment that consumes repeatedly a occurs a claim for poor image quality. However,
lot of electricity connected to the same power these adjustments (including checking) and setting
source? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as are also required when a part is replaced with a new
elevator and air conditioner) one.
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the
machine? [How to use the tables]
• High temperature and high humidity, direct sun- Each item represents the following:
light, ventilation, etc. 1. Mode
• Levelness of the location on which the machine Shows which mode is used for adjustments.
is installed. "25": 25 mode
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original "36": 36 mode
itself? "47": 47 mode
6. Is density selected properly? 2. A circle "{" in the table
7. Is the original glass stained? , ................. : Shows that the order of
8. Is proper paper used for copy? priority has been speci-
9. Are copy materials replaced with new ones at fied for adjustments
their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning (including checking) and
blade, etc.) setting.
10. Is toner filled? { (Empty circle) : Shows that adjustments
(including checking) and
B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site ser- setting can be done
vice independently.
Due attention should be paid to the following when
repairing the machine.

1. In this machine, when the main power switch


(SW1) is turned off, only one side of the AC line

1-1 1
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS


I ADJUSTMENT

• This table shows the list of adjustment items when replacing a part. Items are numbered in " " by the pri-
ority if there is any.

Replacement parts

Drum cartridge (drum) /Y, M, C, K

Belt cleaning blade


Adjustment items

Developer *1

Transfer belt
Mode
PM count PM counter resetting 25
PM cycle set
Parts counter Count of special parts 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K
Fixing cleaning unit
Developer /Y, M, C, K 4
Decurler roller
ISW
Board change mode
Process adjustment Drum peculiarity adjustment Blade setting mode 36 2 2
LD bias adjustment
Automatic gamma adjustment (0) 5 3 7
Automatic developer charge 1
L detection initial auto. adjustment 2
Initial drum rotation 2
Image adjustment Magnification adjustment Printer vertical mag. adjustment
Printer horizontal mag. adjustment
Belt line speed adjustment 3*3
Fixing line speed adjustment 4
Timing adjustment Printer lead edge timing adj.
Auto. color registration adj. 3 5
Color registration manual adjustment 4 6
Image quality Scanner gamma adjustment
adjustment Printer gamma adjustment Printer gamma offset adj.
Printer gamma sensor adj.
Printer screen gradation adj.
Sharpness adjustment
Image judge adjustment Dot detect adjustment
Color text adjustment
ACS adjustment
Other adjustment FNS stapler position adjustment —
Setting powder application 1 1 1
Mirror unit positioning (require the jig)
*1 After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first performed
the L detection adjustment.
*2 When replacing memory board (MB), be sure to replace the developer, 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K,
and fixing cleaning unit.
*3 When adjust the belt line speed adjustment, be sure to adjust the fixing line speed adjustment and auto
color registration adj.

• When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, the memory board
(MB) that was installed on the damaged OACB should be used on the new OACB. Contact the service
manager of the authorized distributor if it is considered that the MB is also damaged. Never perform the
47 mode - 92 (output).

2 1-2
Drum cartridge (drum) /Y, M, C, K
Developer, Transfer belt,

1
6
5
9
3
2
7
4
0

8*3
Belt cleaning blade

1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K

2
1
Image correction unit

4
2
1
3
Charging corona /Y, M, C, K

Fixing roller /U, L

Fixing cleaning unit

Decurler roller

Write unit /K

6
5
2
7
1
Write unit /Y, M, C

5
4
4 3
6
1

3*3 2*3
Dust-proof glass /Y, M, C, K

CCD unit

5
6
7
3
2
1
4

1-3
Each scanner mirror

1
5
6
7
3
2
4
Exposure lamp (L1)

2
3
4
1
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Original glass

2
3
4
1
Overall control board (OACB)
2
1

Printer control board (PRCB)


2
1

Image processing board (IPB)

Operation board /1 (OB1)


2
1

Memory board (MB) *2


1

Registration roller

3
2
1

RADF control board (DFCB)

FNS control board (FNSCB)

Stapler unit

2
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

I ADJUSTMENT
MODE CHANGE MENU KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

4. MODE CHANGE MENU 5. CHECKING BY


THE P FUNCTION
I ADJUSTMENT

4.1 Setting method


The P function is a function that allows you to con-
From this screen, the following modes can be firm the following various numeric values by using
selected without turning off/on the power. the P button.
"1 Basic screen"
"2 36 mode" [1] Total counter
"3 25 mode" [2] Full color counter
"4 Key operator mode" [3] Mono color counter
"5 47 mode" [4] Monochrome counter
[5] Copier counter
A. Procedure [6] Printer counter

1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the


sub power switch (SW2).
5.1 Checking method of the
P function
2. Press the P button and wait until "Enter 4-digit
password to change mode" appears. A. Procedure

3. Input 9272 as the password and press the 1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the
START button. (The password is fixed and sub power switch (SW2).
cannot be changed.) "Mode changing menu
2. Press the P button.
screen" is displayed.
3. "Counter list screen" appears.
4. Press any desired key.
4. Press the ! button in "Counter list screen," and
5. To return to the "Mode changing menu
the PM counter is displayed.
screen," press the P button and wait until the
"Mode changing menu screen" appears. 5. To output the counter value list, press the
[Counter list output] key.
6. After completion of adjustment, press the [Exit]
key to return to the basic screen. 6. Pressing the [Exit] key, or the stop or clear but-
ton returns to the basic screen.

1 1-4
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

6. 25 MODE

I ADJUSTMENT
6.1 List of adjustment items for
25 mode
Adjustment item menu Remarks
1. Software SW setting See the "List of software DIPSW".
2. Paper size setting LCT paper size setting
3. PM count 1. Count reset
2. Change setting
4. Data collection 1. Total count of each paper setting
2. Copy count of each paper size
3. Print count of each paper size
4. RADF count
5. Page fill of each section
6. JAM data of time series
7. JAM count
8. Count of each copy mode
9. SC count
10. JAM count of each section
11. SC count of each section
5. Parts counter 1. Count of special parts
2. Count of each parts
6. Password setting 1. Key operator password 4 digits
2. EKC master key code 8 digits
3. Weekly timer password 4 digits
7. Telephone number setting 1. Service centre Telephone number 16 digits
2. Service centre FAX number 16 digits
8. M/C serial number setting 1. Main body
2. Option tray
3. RADF
4. Finisher
9. Indication of ROM version
10. KRDS setting See the KRDS manual
provided separately
11. ISW
12. Setting date input
13. Board change mode

1-5
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

6.2 Setting method 6.3 Setting software DIPSW


I ADJUSTMENT

This machine is provided with the 25 mode as an A. Setting method


adjustment method. This mode is used when the The software DIPSW is set on "Software SW setting
memory board (MB) is rewritten or various settings screen."
are made.
Note:
A. Procedure • Please note that DIPSW bits are written into
the memory board (MB) each time a change is
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) with the
made.
main power switch (SW1) left ON.
B. Meaning of the values displayed on the
2. While pressing the numeric keys 2 and 5 at the
screen
same time, turn on the SW2. the "25 mode
menu screen" appears.
At this point, the machine enters the 25 mode
with normal copy operations unavailable.

3. Press the item keys on the liquid crystal dis-


play (LCD). A setting screen corresponding to
each item appears.

4. Confirm the input data on the setting screen of [1] [2] [3] [4] 8050fs1026e

each item.
[1] DIPSW number
5. Turn off the SW2 to release the 25 mode. [2] Bit number (0 to 7)
[3] Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF
6. New data will be effective after restarting. [4] 8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadec-
imals from 00 to FF.

C. Procedure

1. Enter the 25 mode.

2. "25 mode menu screen"


Press the [1. Software SW setting] key.

3. "Software SW setting screen"


Select a DIPSW number by using the arrow
key on the left.

4. Select a bit number of the DIPSW by using the


arrow key on the right.

5. Select the ON (1) or OFF (0) of the DIPSW by


using the [ON] or [OFF] key.

6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return


to the "25 mode menu screen".

• For each function of the DIPSW, see "List of soft-


ware DIPSW."

1 1-6
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

List of software DIPSW

I ADJUSTMENT
Note:
• Be sure not to change bits data with no particular reference made of the function.
• Bit number of the default values in parentheses is the default value for the new type.

DIPSW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default values


Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW1 0 — — — 1 1 1
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Print stop method after toner *1 *1 1 1 1
3 supply or waste toner full dis- *1 *1 0 0 0
play
4 Prohibition of printing when Not prohibited Prohibited 0 0 0
the PM count is reached
5 Print number setting until *2 *2 0 0 0
6 printing is prohibited after PM *2 *2 0 0 0
7 is displayed *2 *2 0 0 0
DIPSW2 0 Hard disk connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Switchover of the main body For machines with For machines with 1 1 1
paper exit speed (measures measures not taken measures taken
against uneven wax) Speed increased while Speed not increased
in the paper exit while in the paper exit
3 Paper exit full sensor (PS12) For machines with For machines with 1 1 1
type (Measure against measures not taken measures taken
uneven wax) Photo interrupter type Reflective type
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Switchover of the rotational *4 *4 1 1 1
7 speed of the polygon motor *4 *4 0 0 0
DIPSW3 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 SC latch (SC34/35/36) Unlatched Latched 0 0 0
2 Password request for 25, 36, Not requested Requested 0 0 0
47 mode (password: 9272)
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 47 mode 15-01, 02 counter clear Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0

1-7 2
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

DIPSW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default values


Japan Inch Metric
I ADJUSTMENT

DIPSW4 0 — — — 0 (1) 0 (1) 0 (1)


1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 1 0
3 — — — 0 0 1
4 Recovery from removal of the Disabled Enabled 0 1 0
key counter
5 APS when change magnifica- Enabled Disabled 0 1 0
tion
6 Change of fixed magnifications Enabled Disabled 1 0 0
setting in key operator mode
7 Large size paper counting Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0
method (Other than PM
counter)
DIPSW5 0 Image background restraint *27 Standard *27 Restrained 0 0 0
(toner density) Y
1 Image background restraint *27 Standard *27 Restrained 0 0 0
(toner density) M
2 Image background restraint *27 Standard *27 Restrained 0 0 0
(toner density) C
3 Image background restraint *27 Standard *27 Restrained 0 0 0
(toner density) K
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Change of the size of the B4, 8.5 x 14 or A3, 11 x 17 or 0 0 0
large size paper larger larger
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW6 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0

2 1-8
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

DIPSW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default values


Japan Inch Metric

I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW7 0 Image background restraint *33 Standard *33 Restrained 0 0 0
(potential difference) Y
1 Image background restraint *33 Standard *33 Restrained 0 0 0
(potential difference) M
2 Image background restraint *33 Standard *33 Restrained 0 0 0
(potential difference) C
3 Image background restraint *33 Standard *33 Restrained 0 0 0
(potential difference) K
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW8 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Large size paper PM counting Count as 1 Count as 2 1 1 1
method
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW9 0 Operation when the key Same as Immediate stop 0 0 0
counter is removed (copier) the stop button jam
1 Operation when the key Ignored Same as 0 0 0
counter is removed (IP) DIPSW9-0
2 Message switchover *5 *5 0 0 0
3 *5 *5 0 0 0
4 Copy quantity limit selection *6 *6 0 0 0
5 *6 *6 0 0 0
6 *6 *6 0 0 0
7 *6 *6 0 0 0
DIPSW10 0 Page memory reservation at No reservation 94MB (177MB 0 0 0
power on when MU-412
is installed)
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Black characters for printer *28 *28 0 0 0
7 output (IP) 0 0 0

1-9 2
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

DIPSW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default values


Japan Inch Metric
I ADJUSTMENT

DIPSW11 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Filter for jagged edges on Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
slanting lines
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Jam code display Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW12 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Adjustment of the image qual- Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
ity in the key operator mode
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Black text screen with overlay *7 Screen *7 Error diffusion 0 0 0
function
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW13 0 Size detection switchover 1 A5, A4R 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5x11R 0 1 0
1 Size detection switchover 2 A6R Post card 1 0 0
2 Size detection switchover 3 8.5 x 14 F4 0 0 0
3 Size detection switchover 4 *8 *8 0 0 0
4 *8 *8 0 1 0
5 F4 size setting *9 *9 0 0 0
6 *9 *9 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW14 0 Size detection switchover 5 B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
(main body) 8.5 x 11 / B5R
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Size detection switchover 5 B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
(bypass) 8.5 x 11 / B5R
4 Size detection switchover 5 B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
(platen) 8.5 x 11/B5R
5 Size detection switchover 5 B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K/16K / 16KR 0 0 0
(ADF) 8.5 x 11 / B5R
6 Size detection switchover 5 B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
(PI) 8.5 x 11 / B5R
7 0 0 0

2 1-10
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

DIPSW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default values


Japan Inch Metric

I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW15 0 Selection of the KRDS type Telephone line E-mail 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 FNS alarm stop method *10 *10 0 0 0
4 *10 *10 0 0 0
5 KRDS connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW16 0 Remote diagnostic system KRDS RD mode 0 0 0
selection
1 Recognizing the copy reser- Copy reservation Copy reservation 0 0 0
vation function/coin vendor function enabled function prohibited
Coin vendor disabled Coin vendor enabled
2 Coin vendor type Parallel Serial 0 0 0
communication communication
3 Counting of the key counter in Not counted Counted 0 0 0
the printer mode (IP)
4 Display of the total count start Displayed Not displayed 0 0 0
date (P function)
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 NIC selection for E-Mail IP NIC Copier NIC 0 0 0
KRDS
DIPSW17 0 Summer time setting *11 *11 0 0 0
1 *11 *11 1 1 1
2 *11 *11 1 1 1
3 *11 *11 0 0 0
4 Density selection at scanning *12 *12 0 0 0
5 the tabed paper *12 *12 0 0 0
6 *12 *12 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW18 0 Tray 1 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
1 Tray 2 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
2 Tray 3 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
3 Tray 4 (LCT) faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Folding, stitch & folding, tri-fold, Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
trimmer faulty part isolation
6 PI faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
7 HDD faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0

1-11 2
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

DIPSW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default values


Japan Inch Metric
I ADJUSTMENT

DIPSW19 0 — — — 0 0 1
1 Fixing upper and lower roller *13 *13 1 1 1
2 temperature selection *13 *13 1 1 1
3 *13 *13 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 PK faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
6 Default resolution of the IP *14 *14 0 0 0
7 scanner *14 *14 0 0 0
DIPSW20 0 Group stapling mode Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
1 Image scanning area with *15 Normal * 15 Original priority 0 0 0
shift function
2 Selection of the stamped Based on Based on 0 0 0
page number original transfer paper
3 Keyboard layout ABC layout QWERTY layout 0 0 0
4 Periodical black toner band *29 Normal *29 Increased at 0 0 0
creation on the transfer belt the edges
5 Switchover of the fixing con- *30 Measures *30 Measures 1 1 1
trol table (Old type only) against uneven against uneven
wax not provided wax provided
6 — — — 1 1 1
7 Front and back registration of *31 Not provided *31 Provided 0 0 0
the tray
DIPSW21 0 Paper exit cooling fan (M61, Not provided Provided 0 (1) 0 (1) 0 (1)
62, 63)
1 LCT size setting in the key Disabled Enabled 1 1 1
operator mode
2 Display of the original count Displayed Not displayed 0 0 0
3 2 Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
210 to 256 g/m paper exit
with its face up
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Type of paper selection with *34 Special paper *34 Paper weight 0 0 0
APS not applicable 6 not applicable
7 — — — 0 0 0

2 1-12
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

DIPSW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default values


Japan Inch Metric

I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW22 0 IP address setting Disabled Enabled 1 1 1
1 Number of punch holes *16 *16 0 1 0
2 *16 *16 0 0 1
3 Image reference position for Based on user Based on APS at 0 0 0
the non-standard size original selection ADF
4 Function of the power save Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
button
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Operation when FNS runs out Staple supply Selecting between 0 0 0
of staple request staple supply or
staple release
7 IP gamma correction when Not requested Requested 0 0 0
machine is powered ON
DIPSW23 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Output when EKC (ECM) Enabled (counted Disabled (regis- 0 0 0
user ID is unmatched (IP) as the other user) tered in JOB list)
2 Precision of the color registration *17 Normal *17 Fine 0 0 0
automatic correction (periodical correction)
3 Control of the color registration automatic *18 Enabled *18 Disabled 0 0 0
correction (periodical correction)
4 Main scan correction of the color *19 Enabled *19 Disabled 0 0 0
registration automatic correction
(periodic correction)
5 IP gamma correction *20 Enabled *20 Disabled 0 0 0
6 Job memory registration of the spe- Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
cial paper setting on the bypass tray
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW24 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Vs/Vp switch control *21 Disabled *21 Enabled 0 0 0
2 Image stabilization control *22 *22 0 0 0
3 timing *22 *22 1 1 1
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW25 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Color registration correction *23 *23 0 0 0
4 control *23 *23 0 0 0
5 Color registration fine correction Yes No 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 De-humid heater ON OFF 0 0 0

1-13 2
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

DIPSW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default values


Japan Inch Metric
I ADJUSTMENT

DIPSW26 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW27 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW28 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Toner refresh mode (at job end) *24 Disabled *24 Enabled 0 0 0
3 Toner refresh mode (periodical) *24 Disabled *24 Enabled 0 0 0
4 Printer gamma offset adjust- *25 Only high light *25 Whole area 0 0 0
ment
5 PK punch mode restriction Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW29 0 Toner refresh mode cycle *24 *24 0 0 0
1 (periodical) 0 0 0
2 Increase transfer current against Not Correspond 1 1 1
white spots image (Old type only) correspond
3 Include of proof copy to the Not included Included 0 0 0
set copy quantity
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW30 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Restriction of the display of Restricted Not restricted 0 0 0
the 25 mode data correction
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 1 1 1
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0

2 1-14
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

DIPSW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default values


Japan Inch Metric

I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW31 0 — — — 1 1 1
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW32 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Reset condition for the spe- Auto reset, reset Power OFF 0 0 0
cial paper setting of the button, tray selec-
bypass tray tion, power OFF
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Measures against paper For machines with For machines with 1 1 1
reverse/exit jam measures not taken measures taken
Rubber roller Spike roller
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0

1-15 2
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

*1 Print stop method after toner supply or waste *6 Copy quantity limit selection
toner full display
I ADJUSTMENT

Mode 9-7 9-6 9-5 9-4


Mode 1-3 1-2 No limit 0 0 0 0
Stops after ejecting 0 0 1 sheet 0 0 0 1
paper in the machine 3 sheets 0 0 1 0
Stops at a break 0 1 5 sheets 0 0 1 1
between copy set 9 sheets 0 1 0 0
Stops at the end of the 1 0 10 sheets 0 1 0 1
current job 20 sheets 0 1 1 0
Does not stop 1 1 30 sheets 0 1 1 1
50 sheets 1 0 0 0
99 sheets 1 0 0 1
*2 Print number setting until printing is prohibited
No limit 1 0 1 0
after PM is displayed
No limit 1 0 1 1
Mode 1-7 1-6 1-5 No limit 1 1 0 0
1,000 prints 0 0 0 No limit 1 1 1 0
2,000 prints 0 0 1 No limit 1 1 1 1
3,000 prints 0 1 0
4,000 prints 1 1 0
*7 Black text screen with overlay function
5,000 prints 1 0 0
When using the overlay of the applied func-
1,000 prints 1 0 1
tion, the image creation method of black char-
1,000 prints 0 1 1
acters is switched between the error diffusion
1,000 prints 1 1 1
and the screen.

Mode 12-6
Screen 0
Error diffusion 1
*4 Switchover of the rotational speed of the poly-
gon motor
*8 Size detection switchover 4
Mode 2-7 2-6
1/1 speed 0 0 Mode 13-4 13-3
1/1 speed 0 1 A5R 0 0
2/3 speed 1 0 B6R 0 1
1/2 speed 1 1 5.5 x 8.5R 1 0
— 1 1

*5 Message switchover
*9 F4 size setting
Mode 9-3 9-2
Please insert key 0 0 Mode 13-6 13-5
counter 8 x 13 0 0
Please insert copy card 0 1 8.25 x 13 0 1
Please insert coin 1 0 8.125 x 13.25 1 0
Please insert key 1 1 8.5 x 13 1 1
counter

2 1-16
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

*10 FNS alarm stop method *12 Density selection when scanning the tabed
This setting is used to determine when to stop paper

I ADJUSTMENT
if a FNS full alarm is detected.
Mode 17-6 17-5 17-4
Functions detected are;
80 0 0 0
Lower limit of the FNS tray, the number of the
40 (most lighter) 0 0 1
FNS trays, FNS booklet tray, PK punch
60 0 1 0
scraps, TU scraps and TU stacker
100 0 1 1
Mode 15-4 15-3 120 1 0 0
Stops immediately after 0 0 160 1 0 1
detection 200 1 1 0
Stops at a break 0 1 255 (most darker) 1 1 1
between copy set after
detection
*13 Fixing upper and lower roller temperature
Does not stop while in 1 0
selection
printing
Temperature up: Decrease a insufficient
Does not stop while in 1 1
fixing or fixing winding
printing
jam
Temperature down: Decrease paper exit curl-
*11 Summer time setting ing or waving

Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0


Note:
0 minute 0 0 0 0
• Parentheses are setting value for the new
10 minutes 0 0 0 1
type.
20 minutes 0 0 1 0
30 minutes 0 0 1 1
40 minutes 0 1 0 0 Mode 19-3 19-2 19-1
50 minutes 0 1 0 1 -30°C (-15°C) 0 0 0
60 minutes 0 1 1 0 -20°C (-10°C) 0 0 1
70 minutes 0 1 1 1 -10°C (-5°C) 0 1 0
80 minutes 1 0 0 0 Standard 0 1 1
90 minutes 1 0 0 1 Upper roller: standard (+5°C) 1 0 0
100 minutes 1 0 1 0 Lower roller: +10°C (+5°C)
110 minutes 1 0 1 1 Standard (+10°C) 1 0 1
120 minutes 1 1 0 0 Standard (-25°C) 1 1 0
130 minutes 1 1 0 1 Standard (-20°C) 1 1 1
140 minutes 1 1 1 0
150 minutes 1 1 1 1
*14 Default resolution of the IP scanner

Mode 19-7 19-6


400dpi 0 0
600 dpi 0 1
200 dpi 1 0
300 dpi 1 1

1-17 2
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

*15 Image scanning area with shift function *19 Main scan correction of the color registration
Normal: Compare the original size and the auto correction (periodical correction)
I ADJUSTMENT

transfer paper size and the smaller The color registration corrections, in the main
one is to be the image area. scanning direction that are periodically per-
Original priority: formed can be omitted. This is used tempo-
Original size is to be the image rarily when there is a registration error along
area. the main scan as a result of a trouble around
the transfer belt unit, or when separating
Mode 20-1
faulty points.
Normal 0
Original priority 1 Mode 23-4
Enabled 0
Disabled 1
*16 Number of punch holes

Mode 22-2 22-1


*20 IP gamma correction
2 holes (for Japan) 0 0
In order to separate defective items when
3 holes (for inch area) 0 1
there is poor images sent from IP. The gamma
4 holes (for metric area) 1 0
correction can be omitted. The gamma correc-
— 1 1
tion table is stored in the printer controller.

*17 Precision of the color registration automatic Note:


correction (periodical correction) • When installing the printer controller, be sure
"Fine" is used when the precision of the color that the setting is made to "1."
registration correction that is periodically con-
ducted is increased with the amount of error
Mode 23-5
reduced. However, it takes about 2 minutes
Enabled 0
longer for correction.
Disabled 1
Mode 23-2
Normal 0
*21 Vs/Vp switch control
Fine 1
This Vs/Vp switch control is used when there
is an image erasure around a solid image in
*18 Color registration auto correction control (peri- the half-tone section in early stage after the
odical correction) change of developer.
Down time while in the continuous printing is
Mode 24-1
reduced with the color registration correction
Disabled 0
omitted that is periodically performed (color
Enabled 1
registration correction at power ON is not
omitted).

Mode 23-3
Enabled 0
Disabled 1

1 1-18
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

*22 Image stabilization control timing *24 Toner refresh mode


Correction made: When printing coverage is low (5% or less of

I ADJUSTMENT
Correction is performed by sus- each color), rough image, white spot or toner
pending print at specified print. spillage tend to occur due to toner deteriora-
No correction made: tion.
Correction is omitted temporarily to The effective measure against these are as
reduce down time when the follows.
machine cannot be used with SC • DIPSW 28-2
due to the malfunction of the drum Toner refresh mode (at Job end)
potential sensor or gamma sensor. For the colors of which print coverage of
No correction while in printing: the previous job is 5% or less (convert into
Correction that is performed by A4), solid toner of the difference amount
suspending print at every specified from the 5% is developed to consume
print is performed after the print job toner.
to reduce down time.
Mode 28-2
Mode 24-3 24-2 Disabled 0
Correction made 0 0 Enabled 1
Correction not made 0 1
• DIPSW 28-3
No correction while in 1 0
Toner refresh mode (periodical)
printing
Check the average print coverage for each
— 1 1
color at prescribed distance of developing
sleeve drive develops the toner amount
*23 Color registration correction control equivalent of 8-sheet A3 solid for the color
Correction made: of which the average print coverage is 5%
Correction is performed by sus- or less (convert into A4).
pending print at specified print.
Mode 28-3
No correction made:
Disabled 0
Correction is omitted temporarily to
Enabled 1
reduce down time when the
machine cannot be used with SC • DIPSW29-0,1
due to malfunctions around the Toner refresh mode cycle (periodical)
color registration sensor. Effective only when the DIPSW 28-3 is set
No correction while in printing: to "1". The execution cycle of the toner
Correction that is performed by sus- refresh mode is changed. The cycle varies
pending print at every specified according to the developer drive distance
print is performed after the print job and the temperature.
to reduce down time.
Mode 29-1 29-0
Mode 25-4 25-3 Equivalent to every 0 0
Correction made 0 0 1,000 prints
Correction not made 0 1 Equivalent to every 500 0 1
No correction while in 1 0 prints
printing Equivalent to every 330 1 0
— 1 1 prints
— 1 1

1-19 2
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

*25 Printer gamma offset adjustment *28 Black characters for printer output (IP)
Change the area in which the printer gamma Change the black laser PWM for printing from
I ADJUSTMENT

offset of the 36 mode can be adjusted. PC.


0: High light area only However, if the black laser is set thinner, the
1: Possible in whole area gradation changed. Check the gradation after
changing the setting.
Mode 28-4
High light area only 0 Mode 10-7 10-6
Possible in whole area 1 Standard 0 0
Make black characters thin. (Mild) 0 1
Make black characters thin. 1 0
*27 Image background restraint (toner density)
(Medium)
Y, M, C, K
Make black characters thin. 1 1
Restrain image background by reducing the
(Intense)
toner density of the developer (toner and car-
rier ratio) by about 0.2%.
This setting changes the toner density of the *29 Periodical black toner band creation on the
developer so that image density does not transfer belt
change at once. When set to "1," the black toner band periodi-
After changing the DIPSW, set the test pattern cally created on the transfer belt, more toner
density of the color changed to 128 (with the is supplied to the both edges of the belt clean-
density of other colors set to 0), and output 10 ing blade to prevent the occurrence of white
sheets of the test pattern No. 1 to check stripes on the image and the flipping of the
image background. both edges of the belt cleaning blade.
And also, after changing the DIPSW, be sure
Mode 20-4
to conduct the automatic gamma adjustment
Normal 0
(0) of the process adjustment.
Increased at the edges 1
There are two DIPSW that restrain image
background: toner density (DIPSW 5-0 to 3)
and a potential difference (DIPSW 7-0 to 3). *30 Switchover of the fixing control table (Old type only)
Image background can be restrained more When set to "1", the fixing temperature in the
effectively with the DIPSW 7-0 to 3. When slower line speed mode is controlled low to
image background occurs, be sure to use the improve uneven wax. However, when tray
DIPSW 7-0 to 3 for the first priority. If it is not switches to a tray in which paper of different
sufficiently effective, use the DIPSW 5-0 to 3 fixing temperature control is loaded (tempera-
at the same time. ture is lowered), it takes long waiting time.
Max. approx. 150 seconds. (It takes long only
Note: when the memory switch "No.52 Time lag to
• Since the DIPSW 7-0 to 3 changes the poten- switch tray" is set to "Standard" in the key
tial, the carrier may stick to the drum and operator mode.)
damage the drum and the cleaning blade.
Mode 20-5
Therefore, use this DIPSW only when neces-
Measures against uneven wax not 0
sary.
provided
Measures against uneven wax pro- 1
Mode 5-3 5-2 5-1 5-0 vided
K C M Y
Standard 0 0 0 0
Restrained 1 1 1 1

2 1-20
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

*31 Front and back registration of the tray *34 Type of paper selection with APS
The image timing and the magnification for Select a type of paper that can be selected for

I ADJUSTMENT
each tray and paper type can be adjusted. the APS.
(user mode) Special paper not applicable:
Coated, tab and exclusive paper are
Mode 20-7
not applicable. All types of paper from
Not provided 0
paper weight 4 (106 to 162 g/m2) to 6
Provided 1
(210 to 256 g/m2) are not applicable.
Paper weight 6 not applicable:
All types of paper in paper weight 6
(210 to 256 g/m2) are not applicable.
*33 Image background restraint (potential differ-
Mode 21-6
ence)
Special paper not applicable 0
Increase the potential difference between the
Paper weight 6 not applicable 1
charging potential and the developing bias to
restrain image background. After changing
the DIPSW, be sure to conduct the automatic
gamma adjustment (0) of the process adjust-
ment.
There are two DIPSW that restrain image
background: toner density (DIPSW 5-0 to 3)
and a potential difference (DIPSW 7-0 to 3).
Image background can be restrained more
effectively with the DIPSW 7-0 to 3. When
image background occurs, be sure to use the
DIPSW 7-0 to 3 for the first priority. If it is not
sufficiently effective, use the DIPSW 5-0 to 3
at the same time.

Note:
• Since the DIPSW 7-0 to 3 changes the poten-
tial, the carrier may stick to the drum and
damage the drum and the cleaning blade.
Therefore, use this DIPSW only when neces-
sary.

Mode 7-3 7-2 7-1 7-0


K C M Y
Standard 0 0 0 0
Restrained 1 1 1 1

1-21 2
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

6.4 Paper size setting 6.4.3 Wide paper setting


I ADJUSTMENT

Conduct this setting when changing the paper size A. Procedure


of the LCT.
The paper size is available in the standard size, 1. Enter the 25 mode.

non-standard size and wide paper.


2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.
6.4.1 Standard size setting
3. "Paper size setting screen"
A. Procedure Press the [Wide paper] key.

1. Enter the 25 mode. 4. Press the arrow keys and select the standard
size of the wide paper.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Paper size setting] key. 5. Press the [Enter size] key.

3. "Paper size setting screen" 6. Press the main scan direction key and enter
Press the [Standard size] key. the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
4. Press the arrow key to select the paper size.
7. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the
5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen."
paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
To invalidate the setting that you have
keys.
changed, press the [Cancel] key and return to
"25 mode menu screen." 8. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu
screen."
To invalidate the setting that you have
6.4.2 Non-standard size setting
changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return
to "25 mode menu screen."
A. Procedure

1. Enter the 25 mode.

2. "25 mode menu screen"


Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.

3. "Paper size setting screen"


Press the [Non-standard size] key.

4. Press the main scan direction key and enter


the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.

5. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the


paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys.

6. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu


screen."
To invalidate the setting that you have
changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return
to "25 mode menu screen."

1-22
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

6.5 PM count setting 6.5.2 Change setting

I ADJUSTMENT
Reset the PM count after implementation of the PM A. Procedure
and set and/or change the PM cycle.
The selection of the PM cycle is available in the 1. Enter the 25 mode.

total count and the distance in operation of the


2. "25 mode menu screen"
developing unit /K. In default, the total count is set.
Press the [3. PM count] key.

6.5.1 Count reset 3. "PM count/cycle screen"


Press the [Page] or [Distance] key.
A. Procedure
4. Enter a cycle value through the numeric keys.
1. Enter the 25 mode. Only the upper three digits can be entered.

2. "25 mode menu screen" 5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu
Press the [3. PM count] key. screen."
To invalidate the setting that you have
3. "PM count/cycle screen"
changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return
Press the [Count reset] key.
to "25 mode menu screen."

4. "PM count reset confirmation screen"


Press the [YES] key when resetting the PM
count. The PM count is reset and the starting
date of the PM count is automatically entered.
When the [NO] key is pressed, the PM count is
not reset and return to "PM count/cycle
screen."

1-23
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

6.6 Data collection B. Data collection confirmation method


(1) Procedure
I ADJUSTMENT

It is possible to confirm various data held in the


1. Enter the 25 mode.
machine. It is also possible to confirm collected data
by the KRDS, list output and the mail remote notifi- 2. "25 mode menu screen"
cation system. Press the [4. Data collection] key.

A. Data that can be confirmed 3. "Data collection menu screen"


1. Total count of each paper size Press the key of a data collection item that you
2. Copy count of each paper size want to confirm.
3. Print count of each paper size To select any succeeding key to the key 11,
4. RADF count press the arrow key.
5. Page fill of each section
4. "Individual data confirmation screen"
6. JAM data of time series
Press the arrow key to scroll the screen.
7. JAM count
8. Count of each copy mode
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
• Count of each copy mode (1)
to "25 mode menu screen."
• Count of each copy mode (2)
9. SC count
10. JAM count of each section
Note:
11. SC count of each section
• The [Count reset] key is shown in the individ-
ual data confirmation screen of the [10. JAM
Note:
count of each section] and the [11. SC count
• When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, 6 to 11 can be
of each section].
confirmed.
When pressing the [COUNT RESET] key,
"Count reset confirmation screen" is shown,
and when pressing the [YES] key, the section
data is reset.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Individual
data confirmation screen" with the interval
data not reset.
Reset these data while in the PM implementa-
tion to confirm the jam or SC occurrence
count after it was visited last time.

1-24
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

C. Details of the data collection


(1) Data collection No. 1 to 3: Total, copy and

I ADJUSTMENT
printer counts of each paper size

NO KRDS parameter For Remark


(B1, B6, B8, BD, BE, BF) Japan Inch Metric
1 00 A2 17 x 22 A2 Not used
2 01 A3 11 x 17 A3
3 02 B4 8.5 x 14 B4 (8K)
4 03 A4 8.5 x 11 A4
5 04 B5 5.5 x 8.5 B5 (16K)
6 05 A5 — A5
7 06 B6 — F4
8 07 8.5 x 14 — —
9 08 8.5 x 11 A4 —
10 09 Special Special Special

• Maximum count: 99,999,999


• 1 count is made for paper of All types regardless
of the paper size.
• All sheets of paper that do not come under the
size of No. 1 to No. 9 are counted as special.
However, SEL and LEF are counted as the same
size.
• The non-standard and the wide paper are
counted as special.

1-25
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

(2) Data collection No. 4: RADF count


I ADJUSTMENT

NO KRDS parameter (F0) Item Remark


1 00 No. of originals fed in ADF mode
2 01 No. of originals fed in RADF mode
3 02 No. of originals fed in RDH mode Not used
4 03 No. of originals fed in RRDH mode
5 04 No. of originals fed in LDH mode
6 05 No. of originals fed in CFF mode
7 06 No. of 1 sided SDF original fed
8 07 No. of mix originals fed in ADF mode
9 08 No. of mix originals fed in RADF mode
10 09 No. of originals fed in 2 in 1 mode Not used
11 0A No. of 1 sided z-folded original fed
12 0B No. of 2 sided z-folded original fed
13 0C No. of 2 sided SDF original fed Not used
14 0D —

• Maximum count: 99,999,999

(3) Data collection No. 5: Page fill of each sec-


tion
It is possible to confirm the average pixel ratio of
5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of Y,
M, C and K.
This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the
dot area of pixels and the transfer paper area, and
is different from the print ratio when actually printed.

(4) Data collection No. 6: JAM date of time


series
With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible
to confirm originating jam code, total count, date of
occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size and
magnification.

1-26
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

(5) Data collection No. 7: Jam count / No. 10. NO KRDS Jam code is shown on Section
JAM count of each section Parameter the LCD display when

I ADJUSTMENT
(J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
NO KRDS Jam code is shown on Section
33 20 J72-16 FNS
Parameter the LCD display when
(J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 34 21 J72-17
1 00 J10-01 Bypass 35 22 J72-18
2 01 J10-02 36 23 J72-19
3 02 J10-03 37 24 J72-20
4 03 J11-01 Tray 1 38 25 J72-21
5 04 J12-01 Tray 2 39 26 J72-22
6 05 J13-01 Tray 3 40 27 J72-23
7 06 J14-01 LCT 41 28 J72-24
8 07 J17-01 Paper 42 29 J72-25
9 08 J17-02 feed 43 2A J72-26
10 09 J17-03 44 2B J72-28
11 0A J17-04 45 2C J72-29
12 0B J17-05 46 2D J72-30
13 0C J17-06 47 2E J72-32 TU
14 0D J17-07 48 2F J72-33
15 0E J17-08 49 30 J72-34
16 0F J17-09 50 31 J72-35 PI
17 10 J31-02 Reversed 51 32 J72-38 Not used
18 11 J32-08 paper exit 52 33 J72-39
19 12 J32-04 53 34 J72-40
20 13 J32-01 54 35 J72-41
21 14 J32-05 55 36 J72-42
22 15 J32-07 56 37 J72-43 PK
23 16 J32-02 57 38 J72-44 Not used
24 17 J32-03 58 39 J72-45
25 18 J92-01 ADU 59 3A J72-46
26 19 J93-01 60 3B J72-47
27 1A J94-02 61 3C J72-48 FNS
28 1B J19-01 Vertical 62 3D J72-49 PI
conveyance 63 3E J72-50
29 1C J19-02 LCT 64 3F J72-51
30 1D J51-01 Main body 65 40 J72-60 Not used
31 1E J71-01 FNS 66 41 J72-61
32 1F J71-02 TU 67 42 J72-62
68 43 J72-63
69 44 J72-64
70 45 J72-80 PK
71 46 J72-81 FNS
72 47 J72-82
73 48 J72-83
74 49 J72-90

1-27
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

NO KRDS Jam code is shown on Section


Parameter the LCD display when
I ADJUSTMENT

(J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1


75 4A J61-01 DF
76 4B J61-02
77 4C J61-03
78 4D J62-01
79 4E J62-02
80 4F J62-03
81 50 J62-04
82 51 J62-05
83 52 J62-06
84 53 J62-07
85 54 J17-10 LCT
86 55 — Not used
87 56
88 57
89 58
90 59

• Maximum count: 99,999,999

1-28
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

(6) Data collection No. 8-1: Count of each copy mode (1)

I ADJUSTMENT
NO KRDS Item Count conditions
Parameter
(F1)
1 00 1-1 mode
2 01 1-2 mode
3 02 2-1 mode
4 03 2-2 mode
5 04 ADF 1-1 mode
6 05 ADF 1-2 mode
7 06 Mixed original mode
8 07 Tab original mode
9 08 Z-folded original mode
10 09 LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape (Reg.)
11 0A LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait (Reg.)
12 0B LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape (Rev.)
13 0C LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait (Rev.)
14 0D Enhance Mode: text/photo
15 0E Enhance Mode: Text
16 0F Enhance Mode: Photo
17 10 Enhance Mode: Map
18 11 Non STD size
19 12 1 oblique staple (Upper left)
20 13 1 oblique staple (Upper right)
21 14 2 parallel staples (Left binding)
22 15 2 parallel staples (Upper binding)
23 16 Left binding
24 17 Right binding
25 18 Upper binding
26 19 Three-Folding
27 1A Stapling & Folding
28 1B Folding
29 1C Main tray: Group
30 1D Main tray: Sort
31 1E Main tray: Non sort
32 1F Subtray: Group (FACE DOWN)
33 20 Subtray: Group (FACE UP)
34 21 Subtray: Sort (FACE DOWN)
35 22 Subtray: Sort (FACE UP)
36 23 Subtray: Non sort (FACE DOWN)
37 24 Subtray: Non sort (FACE UP)
38 25 Cover sheet
39 26 Trimmer
40 27 Real size copy
41 28 Preset magnification E4
42 29 Preset magnification E3
43 2A Preset magnification E2

1-29
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

NO KRDS Item Count conditions


Parameter
I ADJUSTMENT

(F1)
44 2B Preset magnification E1
45 2C Preset magnification R4
46 2D Preset magnification R3
47 2E Preset magnification R2
48 2F Preset magnification R1
49 30 User lens mode 1
50 31 User lens mode 2
51 32 User lens mode 3
52 33 Zoom
53 34 Vertical/Horizontal zoom
54 35 Maximum zoom
55 36 Minimum zoom
56 37 APS
57 38 AMS
58 39 AE (AES)
59 3A User density level 1 (Not used)
60 3B User density level 2 (Not used)
61 3C Interrupted copy
62 3D Auto image rotation cancellation
63 3E Sheet insertion
64 3F Chapter control
65 40 Combination
66 41 Booklet copy
67 42 OHP interleave (copy) (Not used)
68 43 OHP interleave (blank) (Not used)
69 44 Image insert
70 45 Book copy
71 46 Program job
72 47 Non-image area erase
73 48 Reverse image
74 49 Auto repeat
75 4A Manual repeat
76 4B STD size repeat
77 4C Frame erasure
78 4D Fold erasure
79 4E Auto layout
80 4F All-image area (Not used)
81 50 Image Shift
82 51 Reduction shift
83 52 Overlay
84 53 Water mark
85 54 Stamp
86 55 Date/Time
87 56 Page

1-30
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

NO KRDS Item Count conditions


Parameter

I ADJUSTMENT
(F1)
88 57 Numbering
89 58 Set quantity 1
90 59 Set quantity 2-5
91 5A Set quantity 6-10
92 5B Set quantity 11 or more
93 5C Time while power remote 1 is ON Accumulation of time during which the
overall control board is powered
94 5D Time while power remote 2 is ON Accumulation of time during which the
remote power 1 is on (in minutes)
95 5E Time while power remote 3 is ON Accumulation of time during which the
remote power 2 is on (in minutes)
96 5F Time while power remote 4 is ON Accumulation of time during which the
built-in controller operates (in minutes)
97 60 Time during Low Power mode Accumulation of time in the low power
mode (1 count for each minute)
98 61 Time during warm up time Accumulation of warm-up time (in min-
utes)
99 62 Time during front door open Accumulation of time during which the front
door is open (in minutes)
100 63 Ope. Time in 1side straight exit Accumulation of time from the start of
101 64 Ope. Time in 1side reverse exit print to the end of print (in minutes)
102 65 Operation time in 2 side print Down time due to jam omitted
103 66 Operation time in ADF mode Accumulation of time during which ADF
operates (in minutes)
104 67 Morning Correction count (Not used)
105 68 Time during APS sensor ON Accumulation of time during which the
APS sensor is on (in minutes)
106 69 N of main tray used jobs
107 6A N of subtray used jobs
108 6B N of stapling & folding used jobs
109 6C N of folding used jobs
110 6D N of ADF NF occurred
111 6E N of ADF special error1 occurred Wrong detection of original size
112 6F N of ADF special error2 occurred Next original information error
113 70 N of ADF special error3 occurred Error in size for which mixed paper is
not allowed
114 71 N of scanner scanned No. of scans in platen mode
115 72 N of electrode cleaned (Not used)
116 73 N of memory overflow
117 74 N of fixing alarm occurred (Not used)
118 75 N of no toner stop occurred (Not used)
119 76 N of AGC retry (Not used)
120 77 N of sub scan beam correct error (Not used)
121 78 N of mis-centering correct error (Not used)

1-31
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

NO KRDS Item Count conditions


Parameter
I ADJUSTMENT

(F1)
122 79 N of distortion adjust error (Not used)
123 7A N of ADF distortion data error (Not used)
124 7B Compression memory overflow
125 7C Page memory overflow (scan)
126 7D Page memory overflow (print)
127 7E FNS alarm (tray/trimming)
128 7F FNS alarm (staple)
129 80 Scanner count
130 81 N of ADF special error4 occurred (Not used)
131 82 Store for HDD (Sync. With Copying)
(Not used)
132 83 Store for HDD (SRVmode Scan → HDD)
(Not used)
133 84 Store for PC (SRVmode Scan → PC)
(Not used)
134 85 Store for PC (SRVmode HDD → PC)
(Not used)
135 86 Recall from HDD (SRVmode HDD) (Not used)
136 87 Recall from PC (SRVmode PC) (Not used)
137 88 Image edit count by SRV
138 89 Wide paper count (A3W) or (11 x 17R)
139 8A Wide paper count (A4W) or (8.5 x 11W)
140 8B Wide paper count (A4WR) or (8.5 x 11RW)
141 8C Wide paper count (A5W) or (5.5 x 8.5W)
142 8D Wide paper count (Others)
143 8E Punch
144 8F Z-Folding (Not used)
145 90 —
146 91 MixPlex (1 side)
147 92 MixPlex (2 side)
148 93 ADF original-thin
149 94
150 95
151 96
152 97
153 98
154 99
155 9A
156 9B
157 9C
158 9D
159 9E
160 9F

• Maximum count: 99,999,999

2 1-32
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

(7) Data collection No. 8-2: Count of each copy mode (2)

I ADJUSTMENT
NO KRDS Item Count conditions
Parameter
(F1)
1 00 ACS
2 01 Full color
3 02 Monochrome
4 03 Mono color (Y)
5 04 Mono color (M)
6 05 Mono color (C)
7 06 Mono color (R)
8 07 Mono color (G)
9 08 Mono color (B)
10 09 DF thick paper
11 0A DF thin paper
12 0B Original type: Printed paper
13 0C Original type: Photo paper
14 0D Original type: Copied paper
15 0E Original type: Inkjet paper
16 0F Original type: Pencil
17 10 Original type: Newspaper
18 11 Screen: Line screen/Smooth tone
19 12 Screen: Line screen/High resolution
20 13 Screen: Dot screen/Smooth tone
21 14 Screen: Dot screen/High resolution
22 15 Screen: High compression
23 16 Gloss mode
24 17 Density shift
25 18 Background adjustment
26 19 Red adjust
27 1A Green adjust
28 1B Blue adjust
29 1C Hue adjustment
30 1D Saturation adjustment
31 1E Brightness adjustment
32 1F Color balance adjustment
33 20 Sharpness adjustment
34 21 Contrast adjustment
35 22 Image judge adjustment
36 23 Paper Type: Normal paper
37 24 Paper Type: Recycle paper
38 25 Paper Type: Color paper
39 26 Paper Type: High quality paper
40 27 Paper Type: Coated paper
41 28 Paper Type: Tab paper
42 29 Paper Type: Color specific paper
43 2A Paper Type: Exclusive paper A

1-33
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

NO KRDS Item Count conditions


Parameter
I ADJUSTMENT

(F1)
44 2B Paper Type: Exclusive paper B
45 2C Paper Type: Exclusive paper C
46 2D Paper Type: Exclusive paper D
47 2E Paper Weight: 1
48 2F Paper Weight: 2
49 30 Paper Weight: 3
50 31 Paper Weight: 4
51 32 Paper Weight: 5
52 33 Paper Weight: 6
53 34 Multi page enlargement
54 35 Main Tray: Face up
55 36 N of no toner stop occurred (Y)
56 37 N of no toner stop occurred (M)
57 38 N of no toner stop occurred (C)
58 39 N of no toner stop occurred (K)
59 3A N of toner recovery box is full
60 3B N of color regist. auto. adj. Counts 1 per every correction operation
61 3C N of auto stability control Counts 1 per every correction operation
62 3D —
63 3E —
64 3F —
65 40 OFF mode time Sum of the OFF mode time (unit: minute)
66 41 ON time of heater (Main body) Sum of the time the heater is on (unit: minute)
67 42 ON time of heater (tray 4) Sum of the time the LCT heater is on (unit: minute)
68 43 Polygon motor operation time Sum of the time the polygon motor is on (unit: minute)
69 44 Develop motor ope. time (color) Sum of the time the developing motor
(color) operates (unit: minute)
70 45 Develop motor ope. time (black) Sum of the time the developing motor
(black) operates (unit: minute)
71 46 ON time of PCL (color) Sum of the time the PCL (color) is on
(unit: minute)
72 47 ON time of PCL (black) Sum of the time the PCL (black) is on
(unit: minute)
73 48 Operation time in Scanner motor Sum of the time the scanner motor oper-
ates (unit: minute)
74 49 Time while power (ADF) Sum of the time the 24V is applied to the
ADF (unit: minute)
75 4A —
76 4B —
77 4C —
78 4D Number of the executions of the toner 1 count for each execution
refresh Y (auto)
79 4E Number of the executions of the toner 1 count for each execution
refresh M (auto)

1 1-34
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

NO KRDS Item Count conditions


Parameter

I ADJUSTMENT
(F1)
80 4F Number of the executions of the toner 1 count for each execution
refresh C (auto)
81 50 Number of the executions of the toner 1 count for each execution
refresh K (auto)
82 51 Number of the manual executions of the 1 count for each execution
toner refresh
83 52 Number of the executions of the filming 1 count for each execution
recovery mode
84 53 Paper type selection: Exclusive paper E
85 54 Paper type selection: Exclusive paper F
86 55 Paper type selection: Exclusive paper G
87 56 Paper type selection: Exclusive paper H
88 57 Paper type selection: Exclusive paper I
89 58 Paper type selection: Exclusive paper J

• Maximum count: 99,999,999

1-35 1
25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

(8) Data collection No. 9: SC occurrence count/ NO KRDS SC code Section


No. 11: Sectional SC occurrence count Parameter
I ADJUSTMENT

(E0)
NO KRDS SC code Section
36 23 SC28-01 High voltage
Parameter
37 24 SC28-02 abnormality
(E0)
1 00 SC10-10 Communication 38 25 SC28-03
abnormality 39 26 SC28-04
2 01 SC13-01 Paper feed motor 40 27 SC29-01
3 02 SC13-02 abnormality 41 28 SC29-02
4 03 SC18-01 Paper feed tray 42 29 SC29-03
5 04 SC18-02 abnormality 43 2A SC29-04
6 05 SC18-03 44 2B SC29-06 Process
7 06 SC18-04 45 2C SC29-07 abnormality
8 07 SC18-50 LT abnormality 46 2D SC29-08
9 08 SC18-51 47 2E SC29-09
10 09 SC18-60 48 2F SC29-10
11 0A SC18-61 49 30 SC29-11
12 0B SC18-70 50 31 SC29-12
13 0C SC18-71 51 32 SC29-13
14 0D SC20-10 Communication 52 33 SC29-14
15 0E SC20-11 abnormality 53 34 SC29-15
16 0F SC20-12 54 35 SC29-16
17 10 SC21-01 PCL abnormality 55 36 SC29-17
18 11 SC21-02 56 37 SC29-18
19 12 SC21-03 57 38 SC29-19
20 13 SC21-04 58 39 SC29-20
21 14 SC23-01 Developing motor 59 3A SC29-21
22 15 SC23-02 abnormality 60 3B SC29-22
23 16 SC23-03 61 3C SC29-23
24 17 SC23-04 62 3D SC30-01
25 18 SC23-05 Drum motor 63 3E SC30-02
26 19 SC23-06 abnormality 64 3F SC30-10 Communication
27 1A SC23-07 abnormality
28 1B SC23-08 65 40 SC32-01 Fan abnormality
29 1C SC23-09 Transfer belt 66 41 SC32-02
30 1D SC23-10 section abnormality 67 42 SC32-03
31 1E SC23-11 Toner supply 68 43 SC32-04
abnormality 69 44 SC32-05
32 1F SC27-01 L-detection 70 45 SC32-06
abnormality 71 46 SC33-01 Motor
33 20 SC27-02 L-detection 72 47 SC33-02 abnormality
34 21 SC27-03 abnormality
73 48 SC33-03
35 22 SC27-04 74 49 SC33-04

1-36
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 25 MODE

NO KRDS SC code Section NO KRDS SC code Section


Parameter Parameter

I ADJUSTMENT
(E0) (E0)
75 4A SC34-01 High fixing 115 72 SC45-01 Color registration
76 4B SC34-02 temperature 116 73 SC45-03 abnormality
abnormality
77 4C SC34-03 117 74 SC45-07
78 4D SC34-04 118 75 SC45-08
79 4E SC34-05 119 76 SC45-09
80 4F SC34-06 120 77 SC45-10
81 50 SC34-07 121 78 SC45-11
82 51 SC34-08 122 79 SC45-12
83 52 SC35-01 Low fixing 123 7A SC45-20
84 53 SC35-02 temperature 124 7B SC46-01 Image
abnormality processing
85 54 SC35-03 125 7C SC46-02
abnormality
86 55 SC35-04 126 7D SC46-03
87 56 SC35-05 127 7E SC46-05
88 57 SC35-06 128 7F SC46-06
89 58 SC36-02 Fixing sensor 129 80 SC46-07
90 59 SC36-04 abnormality 130 81 SC46-08
91 5A SC36-05 131 82 SC46-09
92 5B SC36-06 132 83 SC46-11
93 5C SC36-07 133 84 SC46-12
94 5D SC36-08 134 85 SC46-13
95 5E SC36-09